1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures false
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 1
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 1
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 1
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
158 by the \SpecialChar LyX
163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
165 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
166 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
167 Documentation mailing list:
168 \begin_inset CommandInset href
170 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Newline newline
190 \begin_inset Note Note
193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
194 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
200 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
208 \begin_layout Standard
209 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
210 LatexCommand tableofcontents
217 \begin_layout Chapter
221 \begin_layout Section
222 What is \SpecialChar LyX
226 \begin_layout Standard
228 is a document preparation system.
229 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
230 scripts, publishable books, business
231 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
232 It is unlike most other
233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
240 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
242 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
258 pt type, left justified, 5
259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
268 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
272 \begin_layout Standard
273 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
278 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
282 \begin_layout Standard
287 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
288 's philosophy: most importantly,
289 the format of all of the manuals.
290 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
291 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
297 manual describes that, too.
300 \begin_layout Section
305 \begin_layout Standard
306 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
307 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
309 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
310 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
314 \begin_layout Standard
315 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
316 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
317 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
319 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
320 only a vertical scrollbar.
321 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
322 The first case is large images.
323 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
324 image and use the option
335 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
338 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
339 this doesn't work for equations yet.
342 \begin_layout Standard
343 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
344 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
352 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
359 \begin_layout Section
363 \begin_layout Standard
364 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
366 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
368 Just select the manual you want to read from the
375 \begin_layout Section
376 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
378 \begin_inset CommandInset label
380 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
387 \begin_layout Standard
388 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
389 can be configured via the menu
391 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
395 \begin_inset Index idx
398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
405 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
407 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
408 packages are available.
409 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
411 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
413 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
418 \begin_inset space \space{}
421 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
422 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
424 To force \SpecialChar LyX
425 to re-inspect your system, you should use
427 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
431 \begin_inset Index idx
434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
435 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
441 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
442 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
445 \begin_layout Section
448 \begin_inset CommandInset label
450 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
457 \begin_layout Standard
458 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
459 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
460 installed, but you will not be
461 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
462 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
463 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
464 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
465 document can always be output as plain text
469 \begin_layout Standard
470 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
471 or DocBook classes or packages.
472 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
473 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
476 \begin_layout Standard
477 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
478 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
479 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
482 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
490 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
491 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
494 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
498 \begin_inset Index idx
501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
502 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
510 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
517 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
521 \begin_layout Chapter
522 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
526 \begin_layout Section
527 Basic File Operations
528 \begin_inset Index idx
531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
540 \begin_layout Standard
545 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
546 in addition to some more advanced operations:
549 \begin_layout Itemize
571 \begin_layout Itemize
587 arg "buffer-new-template"
593 \begin_layout Itemize
615 \begin_layout Itemize
625 \begin_layout Itemize
639 \begin_layout Itemize
661 \begin_layout Itemize
673 arg "buffer-write-as"
679 \begin_layout Itemize
693 \begin_layout Itemize
707 \begin_layout Standard
708 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
709 a few minor differences.
712 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
723 command lists the available templates.
724 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
725 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
726 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
734 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
741 \begin_layout Standard
742 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
774 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
775 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
776 is just that — a big, blank space.
784 \begin_layout Standard
805 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
810 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
813 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
831 will reload the document from disk.
832 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
833 and want to restore it to the last save.
842 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
843 them as your changes.
846 \begin_layout Section
847 Basic Editing Features
848 \begin_inset Index idx
851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
858 \begin_inset CommandInset label
860 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
867 \begin_layout Standard
868 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
869 can perform cut and paste operations
870 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
871 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
872 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
873 editing features and how to access
875 We will start with cut and paste.
878 \begin_layout Standard
879 As you might expect, the
883 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
884 various other editing features.
885 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
889 \begin_layout Itemize
895 \begin_inset Index idx
898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
927 \begin_layout Itemize
933 \begin_inset Index idx
936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
965 \begin_layout Itemize
971 \begin_inset Index idx
974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
999 \begin_layout Itemize
1003 \begin_inset space ~
1009 \begin_layout Itemize
1013 \begin_inset space ~
1019 \begin_layout Itemize
1023 \begin_inset space ~
1027 \begin_inset space ~
1033 \begin_inset Index idx
1036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1045 \begin_inset Index idx
1048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1063 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1073 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1079 \begin_layout Standard
1080 The first three are self-explanatory.
1081 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1082 and other programs by
1103 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1104 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1109 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1110 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1111 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1112 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1113 into individual cells.
1117 \begin_inset space ~
1122 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1123 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1127 \begin_layout Standard
1131 \begin_inset space ~
1136 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1138 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1140 \begin_inset space ~
1147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1153 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1154 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1155 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1157 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1161 \begin_inset space \space{}
1164 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1165 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1168 \begin_inset space ~
1171 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1173 \begin_inset space ~
1177 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1181 \begin_inset space ~
1190 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1191 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1193 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1197 \begin_inset space ~
1202 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1203 start a new paragraph.
1204 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1205 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1210 \begin_inset space ~
1213 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1219 \begin_inset space ~
1227 \begin_inset space ~
1230 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1233 paste from the primary selection.
1234 This is normally the currently selected text.
1237 \begin_layout Standard
1240 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1242 \begin_inset space ~
1246 \begin_inset space ~
1254 \begin_inset space ~
1258 \begin_inset space ~
1264 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1270 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1273 \begin_inset space ~
1282 \begin_inset space ~
1287 button to skip the current word.
1291 \begin_inset space ~
1296 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1300 \begin_inset space ~
1305 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1307 If the toggle is set, searching for
1308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1319 will not match the word
1320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1334 Match whole words only
1336 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1337 to only find complete words, e.
1338 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1367 offers also an advanced
1370 \begin_inset space ~
1374 \begin_inset space ~
1379 feature that is described in section
1380 \begin_inset space ~
1384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1386 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1393 \begin_layout Standard
1394 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1395 \begin_inset space \space{}
1399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1407 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1409 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1414 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1421 \begin_layout Standard
1425 arg "inset-select-all"
1428 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1429 When the cursor is inside an inset
1432 arg "inset-select-all"
1435 selects the content of the inset.
1439 arg "inset-select-all"
1442 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1447 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1450 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1454 \begin_layout Section
1456 \begin_inset Index idx
1459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1466 \begin_inset Index idx
1469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1478 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1485 \begin_layout Standard
1486 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1488 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1491 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1494 or the toolbar button
1500 to undo some mistake.
1501 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1503 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1506 or the toolbar button
1513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1520 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1521 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1524 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1527 \begin_layout Standard
1528 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1537 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1538 This is a consequence of the 100
1539 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1542 step undo limit mentioned above.
1545 \begin_layout Standard
1554 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1556 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1560 \begin_layout Section
1562 \begin_inset Index idx
1565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1574 \begin_layout Standard
1575 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1578 \begin_layout Enumerate
1583 \begin_layout Itemize
1588 once anywhere in the edit window.
1589 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1593 \begin_layout Enumerate
1598 \begin_layout Itemize
1605 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1608 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1611 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1612 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1615 \begin_layout Itemize
1616 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1619 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1626 \begin_layout Enumerate
1627 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1631 \begin_layout Standard
1632 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1633 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1637 \begin_layout Section
1639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1641 name "sec:Navigating"
1646 \begin_inset Index idx
1649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1658 \begin_layout Standard
1660 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1663 \begin_layout Itemize
1668 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1669 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1672 \begin_layout Itemize
1673 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1675 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1677 \begin_inset space ~
1682 or by the toolbar button
1685 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1691 \begin_layout Itemize
1692 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1694 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1697 and use the same menu to return to them.
1698 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1701 \begin_layout Standard
1705 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1710 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1711 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1713 \begin_inset space ~
1718 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1719 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1720 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1721 your last editing position.
1724 \begin_layout Standard
1729 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1733 \begin_layout Subsection
1735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1737 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1742 \begin_inset Index idx
1745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1746 Navigating ! Outline
1752 \begin_inset Index idx
1755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1764 \begin_layout Standard
1765 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1766 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1767 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1769 \begin_inset space ~
1773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1775 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1779 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1780 \begin_inset space ~
1784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1786 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1791 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1795 \begin_layout Standard
1796 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1797 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1798 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1799 dialog and to modify the citation.
1802 \begin_layout Standard
1807 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1808 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1810 Labels and References
1812 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1821 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1824 \begin_layout Standard
1825 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1826 you further to control the display.
1831 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1832 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1838 option keeps it in the current view state.
1839 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1840 \begin_inset space ~
1843 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1844 \begin_inset space ~
1847 3, the subsections of sections
1848 \begin_inset space ~
1851 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1856 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1857 \begin_inset space ~
1861 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1871 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1874 \begin_layout Standard
1881 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1882 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1896 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1897 So, for example, you can move section
1898 \begin_inset space ~
1902 \begin_inset space ~
1905 2.4 or after section
1906 \begin_inset space ~
1911 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1924 (or the corresponding key bindings
1932 ) you can change the level of sections.
1933 So you can for example make section
1934 \begin_inset space ~
1938 \begin_inset space ~
1942 \begin_inset space ~
1948 \begin_layout Standard
1949 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1950 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1953 \begin_layout Subsection
1954 Horizontal Scrolling
1955 \begin_inset Index idx
1958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1959 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1967 \begin_layout Standard
1969 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1971 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1975 \begin_inset space \space{}
1979 \begin_inset space ~
1982 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1983 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1984 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1988 \begin_layout Standard
1989 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1993 \begin_layout Itemize
1995 is used on a small tablet computer
1998 \begin_layout Itemize
1999 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2011 \begin_inset space ~
2024 \begin_layout Itemize
2025 Math constructs with long command names
2028 \begin_layout Standard
2029 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2030 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2032 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2033 windows so that table
2034 \begin_inset space ~
2038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2040 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2045 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2047 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2048 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2051 \begin_layout Standard
2052 \begin_inset Float table
2058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2059 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2062 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2064 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2068 Horizontal scrolling test.
2076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2078 \begin_inset Tabular
2079 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2080 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2081 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2125 \begin_layout Section
2126 Input/Word Completion
2127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2129 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2134 \begin_inset Index idx
2137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2144 \begin_inset Index idx
2147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2178 \begin_layout Standard
2180 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2182 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2183 is used to propose completions.
2186 \begin_layout Standard
2187 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2190 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2195 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2202 \begin_inset space ~
2206 \begin_inset space ~
2211 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2215 \begin_inset space ~
2220 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2221 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2225 \begin_inset space ~
2231 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2232 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2233 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2234 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2237 \begin_layout Standard
2239 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2240 completions available.
2245 key to accept a proposed completion.
2246 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2247 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2248 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2255 \begin_layout Standard
2256 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2257 ing options for text.
2258 The special math option
2262 enables characters to be composed.
2263 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2264 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2267 , you can then input the characters
2268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2279 to a formula to get it.
2280 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2281 of the math toolbar.
2282 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2286 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2287 's installation folder.
2288 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2297 \begin_layout Section
2299 \begin_inset Index idx
2302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2309 \begin_inset Index idx
2312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2341 \begin_inset Index idx
2344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2375 \begin_layout Standard
2376 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2390 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2393 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2397 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2398 \begin_inset space ~
2402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2404 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2411 \begin_layout Standard
2415 \begin_inset space ~
2423 \begin_inset space ~
2444 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2448 \begin_layout Labeling
2449 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2453 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2454 LatexCommand nomenclature
2456 description "Tabulator key"
2463 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2465 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2466 \begin_inset space ~
2470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2472 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2479 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2483 , especially section
2484 \begin_inset space ~
2488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2490 reference "subsec:Lists"
2496 If you are still confused, look in the
2501 \begin_inset Newline newline
2509 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2510 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2514 \begin_layout Labeling
2515 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2519 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2520 LatexCommand nomenclature
2522 description "Escape key"
2530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2537 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2538 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2541 \begin_layout Labeling
2542 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2548 \begin_inset space ~
2552 \begin_inset space ~
2559 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2560 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2564 \begin_layout Standard
2565 There are three modifier keys:
2568 \begin_layout Labeling
2569 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2587 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2588 LatexCommand nomenclature
2590 description "Control key"
2595 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2596 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2600 \begin_layout Itemize
2609 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2612 \begin_layout Itemize
2621 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2624 \begin_layout Itemize
2633 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2637 \begin_layout Labeling
2638 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2656 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2657 LatexCommand nomenclature
2659 description "Shift key"
2664 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2665 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2668 \begin_layout Labeling
2669 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2687 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2688 LatexCommand nomenclature
2690 description "Alt or Meta key"
2695 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2696 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2697 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2703 \begin_inset Newline newline
2706 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2708 menu accelerator keys
2711 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2712 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2716 \begin_layout Standard
2717 For example, the sequence
2718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2724 \begin_inset space ~
2728 \begin_inset space ~
2734 \begin_inset space ~
2742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2761 \begin_inset space ~
2767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2777 \begin_layout Standard
2782 manual lists all other things bound to the
2790 \begin_layout Standard
2791 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2793 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2794 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2795 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2796 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2797 The \SpecialChar LyX
2798 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2799 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2800 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2802 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2818 followed by a capital
2825 \begin_layout Chapter
2828 \begin_inset Index idx
2831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2841 \begin_layout Section
2843 \begin_inset Index idx
2846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2855 \begin_layout Subsection
2859 \begin_layout Standard
2860 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2861 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2862 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2863 numbering schemes, and so on.
2864 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2865 and format the title of your document differently.
2868 \begin_layout Standard
2873 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2874 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2875 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2876 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2877 picks one for you by default.
2878 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2881 \begin_layout Subsection
2883 \begin_inset Index idx
2886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2893 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2895 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2902 \begin_layout Standard
2903 You can select a class using the
2905 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2906 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2910 \begin_inset Index idx
2913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2920 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2924 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2928 \begin_layout Standard
2929 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2934 \begin_layout Description
2935 Article for basic articles
2938 \begin_layout Description
2939 Report for basic reports
2942 \begin_layout Description
2943 Book for writing a book
2946 \begin_layout Description
2947 Letter for US-style letters
2950 \begin_layout Standard
2951 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2952 only uses if you have installed
2953 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2954 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2955 distributions will include
2957 Here are some of the classes.
2958 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2960 Special Document Classes
2969 \begin_layout Description
2970 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2973 \begin_layout Description
2974 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2978 \begin_layout Description
2979 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2983 \begin_layout Description
2984 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2985 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2986 There are three article layouts available.
2987 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2988 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2989 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2990 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2995 sequential numbering
2996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2999 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3000 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3001 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3002 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3005 \begin_layout Description
3006 Beamer Layout for presentations
3009 \begin_layout Description
3010 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3011 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3012 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3013 with \SpecialChar LyX
3017 \begin_layout Description
3018 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3021 \begin_layout Description
3023 \begin_inset space ~
3026 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3029 \begin_layout Description
3030 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3033 \begin_layout Description
3034 Foils Used to make transparencies
3037 \begin_layout Description
3038 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3039 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3040 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3041 with \SpecialChar LyX
3045 \begin_layout Description
3046 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3047 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3050 \begin_layout Description
3051 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3054 \begin_layout Description
3055 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3058 \begin_layout Description
3059 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3060 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3061 (Is used by this document.)
3064 \begin_layout Description
3065 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3068 \begin_layout Description
3069 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3072 \begin_layout Description
3077 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3078 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3080 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3084 \begin_layout Description
3085 Slides Used to make transparencies
3088 \begin_layout Description
3090 \begin_inset space ~
3093 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3094 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3097 \begin_layout Description
3098 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3101 \begin_layout Standard
3102 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3104 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3106 Special Document Classes
3113 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3114 of the document classes.
3117 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3121 \begin_layout Standard
3122 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3124 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3125 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3127 \begin_inset Index idx
3130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3147 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3148 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3150 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3153 \begin_layout Standard
3156 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3161 , are highly specialized.
3163 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3164 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3165 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3166 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3167 by some document class.
3168 There are just too many of them.
3169 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3172 \begin_layout Standard
3173 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3181 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3182 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3183 document class for a new file.
3185 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3188 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3195 manual for information on how to install them.
3196 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3202 \begin_layout Standard
3203 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3204 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3205 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3206 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3207 class files to be used for dissertation
3208 s submitted to those universities.
3209 The \SpecialChar LyX
3210 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3212 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3216 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3222 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3225 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3229 name "subsec:Modules"
3234 \begin_inset Index idx
3237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3246 \begin_layout Standard
3247 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3248 chosen document class.
3249 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3250 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3257 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3261 \begin_inset Index idx
3264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3271 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3275 \begin_layout Standard
3276 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3277 packages or file format converters that are not always
3278 installed by default.
3280 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3281 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3282 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3283 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3285 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3286 file without the missing prerequisites.
3287 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3288 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3291 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3295 \begin_inset Index idx
3298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3299 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3305 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3310 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3313 \begin_layout Standard
3314 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3322 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3324 will advise you about these things.
3332 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3336 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3341 \begin_inset Index idx
3344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3345 Document ! Local Layout
3353 \begin_layout Standard
3354 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3355 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3356 : They are intended to be used in
3357 a variety of different documents.
3358 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3359 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3360 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3361 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3362 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3364 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3382 manual for information on how to use it.
3385 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3389 \begin_layout Standard
3390 Each class has a default set of options.
3391 Here's a quick table describing them:
3394 \begin_layout Standard
3395 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3401 \begin_layout Standard
3403 \begin_inset Tabular
3404 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3405 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3406 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3407 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3864 \begin_layout Standard
3865 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3871 \begin_layout Standard
3872 You're probably also wondering what
3873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3877 \begin_inset space ~
3881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3885 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3886 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3891 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3896 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3906 headings, there are also
3914 headings, and so on.
3915 We will describe these headings fully in section
3916 \begin_inset space ~
3920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3922 reference "subsec:Headings"
3929 \begin_layout Subsection
3931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3933 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3938 \begin_inset Index idx
3941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3948 \begin_inset Index idx
3951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3960 \begin_layout Standard
3961 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3963 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3970 \begin_inset space ~
3978 \begin_inset space ~
3983 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3985 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3986 doesn't support special options you want to
3987 use for your document.
3988 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3989 -class and its options, you have to read
3993 \begin_layout Standard
3997 \begin_inset space ~
4004 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4010 \begin_inset space ~
4015 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4016 You can choose between the following five options:
4019 \begin_layout Labeling
4020 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4025 Use default page style of current class.
4028 \begin_layout Labeling
4029 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4034 No page numbers or headings.
4037 \begin_layout Labeling
4038 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4046 \begin_layout Labeling
4047 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4052 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4053 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4054 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4055 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4058 \begin_layout Labeling
4059 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4064 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4065 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4071 \begin_inset Index idx
4074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4082 How they are defined is explained in section
4083 \begin_inset space ~
4087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4089 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4096 \begin_layout Standard
4097 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4098 \begin_inset space ~
4102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4104 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4111 \begin_layout Subsection
4112 Paper Size and Orientation
4113 \begin_inset Index idx
4116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4117 Document ! Paper size
4123 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4125 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4132 \begin_layout Standard
4133 You can find the following options in the menu
4136 \begin_inset space ~
4143 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4147 \begin_inset Index idx
4150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4159 \begin_layout Labeling
4160 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4164 \begin_inset space ~
4169 What size paper to print on.
4174 \begin_layout Itemize
4180 \begin_layout Itemize
4186 \begin_layout Itemize
4192 \begin_layout Itemize
4198 \begin_layout Itemize
4201 US letter, US legal, US executive
4204 \begin_layout Itemize
4210 \begin_layout Itemize
4217 \begin_layout Labeling
4218 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4223 To choose whether to output as
4234 \begin_layout Labeling
4235 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4239 \begin_inset space ~
4244 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4245 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4248 \begin_layout Subsection
4250 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4252 name "subsec:Margins"
4257 \begin_inset Index idx
4260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4267 \begin_inset Index idx
4270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4279 \begin_layout Standard
4280 Paper margins are set in the menu
4282 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4286 \begin_inset Index idx
4289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4298 \begin_layout Standard
4299 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4300 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4301 the paper format and the font size into account.
4304 \begin_layout Subsection
4308 \begin_layout Standard
4309 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4315 That includes the paragraph environments.
4316 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4317 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4318 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4320 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4329 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4331 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4332 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4333 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4336 \begin_layout Section
4337 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4338 \begin_inset Index idx
4341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4342 Paragraph ! Indentation
4350 \begin_layout Subsection
4352 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4354 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4361 \begin_layout Standard
4362 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4363 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4366 \begin_layout Standard
4367 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4368 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4369 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4370 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4374 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4380 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4381 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4382 language than English.
4384 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4387 \begin_layout Standard
4388 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4389 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4390 into \SpecialChar LyX
4392 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4395 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4397 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4398 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4399 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4406 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4407 goes to produce a printable file.
4412 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4414 gives you the ability globally to change
4418 these pre-coded spacings.
4419 We will explain more later.
4422 \begin_layout Subsection
4423 Paragraph Separation
4424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4426 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4431 \begin_inset Index idx
4434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4435 Paragraph ! Separation
4443 \begin_layout Standard
4451 \begin_inset space ~
4459 \begin_inset space ~
4466 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4470 \begin_inset Index idx
4473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4479 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4482 \begin_layout Subsection
4486 \begin_layout Standard
4487 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4490 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4492 \begin_inset space ~
4497 dialog and toggle the
4500 \begin_inset space ~
4505 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4508 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4512 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4513 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4517 \begin_layout Standard
4518 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4519 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4522 \begin_layout Subsection
4524 \begin_inset Index idx
4527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4528 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4536 \begin_layout Standard
4539 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4543 \begin_inset Index idx
4546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4555 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4559 \begin_inset space ~
4568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4569 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4575 \begin_inset Index idx
4578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4585 installed to use this feature.
4590 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4592 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4594 \begin_inset space ~
4599 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4600 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4603 \begin_layout Section
4604 Paragraph Environments
4605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4607 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4612 \begin_inset Index idx
4615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4616 Paragraph ! Environments
4622 \begin_inset Index idx
4625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4626 Paragraph environments|(
4634 \begin_layout Subsection
4638 \begin_layout Standard
4639 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4642 \begin_layout Standard
4651 } \SpecialChar ldots
4661 \begin_inset Newline newline
4664 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4666 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4667 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4668 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4677 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4680 \begin_layout Standard
4681 A paragraph environment is simply a
4682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4689 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4690 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4691 scheme, labels, and so on.
4692 Additionally, you can
4693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4700 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4701 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4702 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4703 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4705 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4707 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4710 \begin_layout Standard
4711 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4712 \begin_inset Graphics
4713 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4719 at the left end of the toolbar.
4721 will change the environment of the
4725 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4726 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4727 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4731 \begin_layout Standard
4740 create a new paragraph using the
4744 paragraph environment.
4746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4753 because if you are in one of these environments:
4756 \begin_layout Itemize
4762 \begin_layout Itemize
4768 \begin_layout Itemize
4774 \begin_layout Itemize
4780 \begin_layout Itemize
4786 \begin_layout Itemize
4792 \begin_layout Itemize
4798 \begin_layout Standard
4800 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4804 , rather than resetting it to
4809 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4810 \begin_inset space ~
4814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4816 reference "sec:Nesting"
4823 \begin_layout Subsection
4827 \begin_layout Standard
4828 The default paragraph environment is
4833 It creates a plain paragraph.
4835 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4836 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4837 this manual) are in the
4844 \begin_layout Standard
4845 You can nest a paragraph using the
4849 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4857 \begin_layout Subsection
4859 \begin_inset Index idx
4862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4871 \begin_layout Standard
4872 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4873 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4882 for thanks or contact information.
4883 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4884 places all of this on a separate page
4885 along with today's date.
4886 For other types of documents, the title
4887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4894 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4898 \begin_layout Standard
4900 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4914 Here's how you use them:
4917 \begin_layout Itemize
4918 Put the title of your document in the
4925 \begin_layout Itemize
4926 Put the author name in the
4933 \begin_layout Itemize
4934 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4935 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4941 Note that using this environment is optional.
4942 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4943 will automatically insert today's date.
4944 If you don't want a date, use the option
4946 Suppress default date on front page
4950 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4951 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4953 \begin_inset space ~
4961 \begin_layout Standard
4962 You can use footnotes to insert
4963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4970 or contact information.
4973 \begin_layout Subsection
4975 \begin_inset Index idx
4978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4985 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4987 name "subsec:Headings"
4994 \begin_layout Standard
4995 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4997 takes care of the numbering for you.
5000 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5002 \begin_inset Index idx
5005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5006 Section headings ! Numbered
5014 \begin_layout Standard
5015 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5019 \begin_layout Enumerate
5025 \begin_layout Enumerate
5031 \begin_layout Enumerate
5037 \begin_layout Enumerate
5043 \begin_layout Enumerate
5049 \begin_layout Enumerate
5055 \begin_layout Enumerate
5061 \begin_layout Standard
5063 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5064 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5065 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5068 \begin_layout Standard
5069 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5070 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5071 You group the book into chapters.
5073 does a similar grouping:
5076 \begin_layout Itemize
5081 is divided into either
5092 \begin_layout Itemize
5104 \begin_layout Itemize
5116 \begin_layout Itemize
5128 \begin_layout Itemize
5140 \begin_layout Itemize
5152 \begin_layout Standard
5153 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5161 Not all document types use the
5165 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5170 is the top-level heading.
5178 \begin_layout Standard
5183 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5184 labels it with its number,
5185 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5187 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5199 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5201 \begin_inset Index idx
5204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5205 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5213 \begin_layout Standard
5214 The unnumbered section headings have a
5215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5222 at the end of their name.
5223 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5224 the table of contents, see section
5225 \begin_inset space ~
5229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5238 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5239 Changing the Numbering
5240 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5242 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5249 \begin_layout Standard
5250 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5251 in the Table of Contents.
5252 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5254 Just as certain classes start with
5268 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5278 This is something you can change.
5281 \begin_layout Standard
5284 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5288 \begin_inset Index idx
5291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5300 \begin_inset space ~
5304 \begin_inset space ~
5309 you will see two counters.
5314 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5315 numbers a section heading.
5316 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5320 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5321 Short Titles of Headings
5322 \begin_inset Index idx
5325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5326 Section headings ! Short titles
5332 \begin_inset Argument 1
5335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5344 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5351 \begin_layout Standard
5352 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5353 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5354 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5355 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5358 \begin_layout Standard
5360 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5361 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5362 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5363 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5366 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5368 \begin_inset space ~
5374 This will insert a box labeled
5375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5379 \begin_inset space ~
5383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5386 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5387 This also works for captions inside floats.
5388 There can only be one short title per title.
5391 \begin_layout Standard
5392 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5395 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5399 \begin_layout Standard
5400 The following information applies to all section headings:
5403 \begin_layout Itemize
5404 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5407 \begin_layout Itemize
5408 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5411 \begin_layout Itemize
5412 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5415 \begin_layout Itemize
5416 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5419 \begin_layout Subsection
5423 \begin_layout Standard
5425 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5439 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5440 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5441 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5442 the text they contain.
5443 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5451 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5454 \begin_layout Standard
5455 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5464 when you start a new paragraph.
5465 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5469 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5470 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5471 have to change back to the
5475 environment yourself.
5478 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5487 \begin_inset Index idx
5490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5499 \begin_layout Standard
5500 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5501 time for the differences.
5510 are identical except for one difference:
5514 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5523 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5526 \begin_layout Standard
5527 Here's an example of the
5540 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5542 See – no indentation!
5546 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5547 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5548 the other paragraph.
5551 \begin_layout Standard
5552 Here's another example, this time in the
5559 \begin_layout Quotation
5565 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5566 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5567 the first line, then
5571 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5575 you were quoting other text.
5578 \begin_layout Quotation
5579 Here's a new paragraph.
5580 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5581 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5584 \begin_layout Standard
5585 As the examples show,
5589 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5590 They should put quotes in the
5595 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5599 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5602 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5604 \begin_inset Index idx
5607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5614 \begin_inset Index idx
5617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5624 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5633 \begin_layout Standard
5638 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5644 \begin_inset Newline newline
5647 Which I did not rehearse!
5651 It could be much worse.
5652 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5654 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5655 indented a bit more than the first.
5656 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5662 \begin_inset Newline newline
5665 And make things look fine
5666 \begin_inset Newline newline
5672 arg "newline-insert newline"
5678 \begin_layout Standard
5683 does not indent both margins.
5684 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5685 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5688 arg "newline-insert newline"
5694 \begin_layout Subsection
5696 \begin_inset Index idx
5699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5706 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5715 \begin_layout Standard
5717 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5727 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5728 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5737 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5738 lets you provide your own label.
5739 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5740 describing some general features of all four of them.
5743 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5747 \begin_layout Standard
5748 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5750 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5751 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5760 reset the environment to
5764 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5765 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5766 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5770 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5774 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5781 \begin_layout Standard
5782 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5783 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5784 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5786 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5787 you read all of section
5788 \begin_inset space ~
5792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5794 reference "sec:Nesting"
5801 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5803 \begin_inset Index idx
5806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5813 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5822 \begin_layout Standard
5823 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5827 paragraph environment.
5828 It has the following properties:
5831 \begin_layout Itemize
5832 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5836 \begin_layout Itemize
5838 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5841 \begin_layout Itemize
5842 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5846 \begin_layout Itemize
5847 The items can have any length.
5849 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5850 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5857 \begin_layout Itemize
5862 environment inside another
5866 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5870 \begin_layout Itemize
5871 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5874 \begin_layout Itemize
5876 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5879 \begin_layout Itemize
5881 \begin_inset space ~
5885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5887 reference "sec:Nesting"
5891 for a full explanation of nesting.
5895 \begin_layout Standard
5896 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5905 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5908 \begin_layout Standard
5909 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5910 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5913 \begin_layout Itemize
5914 The label for the first level
5918 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5922 \begin_layout Itemize
5923 The label for the second level is a dash.
5927 \begin_layout Itemize
5928 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5932 \begin_layout Itemize
5933 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5937 \begin_layout Itemize
5938 Back out to the third level.
5942 \begin_layout Itemize
5943 Back to the second level.
5947 \begin_layout Itemize
5948 Back to the outermost level.
5951 \begin_layout Standard
5952 These are the default labels for an
5957 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5959 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5962 dialog in the submenu
5967 \begin_inset Index idx
5970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5976 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5980 \begin_layout Standard
5981 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5982 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5984 \begin_inset space ~
5988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5990 reference "sec:Nesting"
5997 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5999 \begin_inset Index idx
6002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6009 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6011 name "sec:Enumerate"
6018 \begin_layout Standard
6023 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6024 It has these properties:
6027 \begin_layout Enumerate
6028 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6032 \begin_layout Enumerate
6033 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6037 \begin_layout Enumerate
6039 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6042 \begin_layout Enumerate
6047 environment resets the counter to one.
6050 \begin_layout Enumerate
6063 \begin_layout Enumerate
6064 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6065 Items can have any length.
6068 \begin_layout Enumerate
6069 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6072 \begin_layout Enumerate
6073 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6076 \begin_layout Enumerate
6077 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6081 \begin_layout Standard
6090 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6092 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6093 labels the four different levels in an
6100 \begin_layout Enumerate
6101 The first level of an
6105 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6109 \begin_layout Enumerate
6110 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6114 \begin_layout Enumerate
6115 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6119 \begin_layout Enumerate
6120 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6123 \begin_layout Enumerate
6124 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6129 \begin_layout Enumerate
6130 Back to the third level
6134 \begin_layout Enumerate
6135 Back to the second level.
6139 \begin_layout Enumerate
6140 Back to the outermost level.
6143 \begin_layout Standard
6144 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6148 environment, see section
6149 \begin_inset space ~
6153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6155 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6160 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6164 \begin_layout Standard
6165 There is more to nesting
6169 environments than we've stated here.
6170 You should read section
6171 \begin_inset space ~
6175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6177 reference "sec:Nesting"
6181 to learn more about nesting.
6184 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6186 \begin_inset Index idx
6189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6198 \begin_layout Standard
6199 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6203 list has no fixed label.
6204 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6213 of the first line as the label.
6217 \begin_layout Description
6218 Example: This is an example of the
6225 \begin_layout Standard
6227 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6231 \begin_layout Standard
6233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6240 it is meant that the first usage of the
6244 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6246 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6254 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6259 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6260 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6262 \begin_inset space ~
6268 \begin_inset space ~
6272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6274 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6278 for more information.) Here is an example:
6281 \begin_layout Description
6283 \begin_inset space ~
6286 Example: This one shows how to use a
6289 \begin_inset space ~
6301 \begin_layout Description
6302 Usage: You should use the
6306 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6307 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6309 It's not a good idea to use a
6313 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6314 You're better off using
6326 paragraphs into them.
6329 \begin_layout Description
6330 Nesting: You can nest
6334 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6338 \begin_layout Standard
6339 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6340 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6341 them from the first line.
6344 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6346 \begin_inset Index idx
6349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6358 \begin_layout Standard
6363 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6364 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6368 \begin_layout Standard
6377 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6379 Here are its properties:
6382 \begin_layout Labeling
6383 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6385 \begin_inset space ~
6388 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6397 of each line as the item label.
6402 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6403 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6404 space as described above.
6407 \begin_layout Labeling
6408 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6409 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6410 uses different margins for the item label and the
6411 body of the item text.
6412 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6413 label width plus a little extra space.
6417 \begin_layout Labeling
6418 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6420 \begin_inset space ~
6423 width \SpecialChar LyX
6424 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6425 If the label width is larger, the label
6426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6433 into the first line.
6434 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6435 margin of the rest of the item text.
6438 \begin_layout Labeling
6439 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6441 \begin_inset space ~
6444 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6449 environment has the same left margin.
6450 \begin_inset Newline newline
6453 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6456 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6458 \begin_inset space ~
6463 dialog (toolbar button
6466 arg "layout-paragraph"
6473 \begin_inset space ~
6478 determines the default label width.
6479 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6488 multiple times instead.
6489 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6499 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6502 \begin_inset space ~
6507 every time you alter a label in a
6512 \begin_inset Newline newline
6515 The predefined default width is the length of
6516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6524 \begin_inset space ~
6530 \begin_layout Standard
6535 list the same way as the
6539 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6545 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6549 \begin_layout Standard
6554 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6555 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6557 \begin_inset space ~
6561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6563 reference "sec:Nesting"
6567 to learn about nesting.
6570 \begin_layout Standard
6571 There is yet another feature of the
6575 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6576 left-justifies the item labels by
6578 You can use additional
6582 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6583 justifies the item label.
6588 are documented in section
6589 \begin_inset space ~
6593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6595 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6600 Here are some examples:
6603 \begin_layout Labeling
6604 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6605 Left The default for
6612 \begin_layout Labeling
6613 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6614 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6621 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6624 \begin_layout Labeling
6625 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6626 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6630 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6637 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6640 \begin_layout Subsection
6642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6644 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6649 \begin_inset Index idx
6652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6661 \begin_layout Standard
6662 The features described in this section require that the module
6664 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6666 is loaded in the document settings.
6667 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6673 \begin_inset Index idx
6676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6686 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6687 Custom Enumerate Lists
6688 \begin_inset Index idx
6691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6692 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6700 \begin_layout Standard
6702 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6705 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6708 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6709 There you add the command
6712 \begin_layout Standard
6720 \begin_layout Standard
6732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6733 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6734 Code, look at section
6735 \begin_inset space ~
6739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6741 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6754 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6761 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6762 For capital Roman numerals replace
6774 in the command above.
6775 For Arabic numerals use
6783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6790 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6805 \begin_layout Standard
6807 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6815 You can only number 26
6816 \begin_inset space ~
6819 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6827 \begin_layout Standard
6828 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6829 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6832 \begin_layout Standard
6833 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6836 \begin_layout Enumerate
6837 \begin_inset Argument 1
6840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6866 \begin_layout Enumerate
6867 \begin_inset Argument 1
6870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6893 \begin_layout Enumerate
6898 \begin_layout Enumerate
6899 \begin_inset Argument 1
6902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6926 \begin_layout Enumerate
6927 \begin_inset Argument 1
6930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6956 \begin_layout Standard
6957 For this list these commands were used:
6960 \begin_layout Standard
6971 \begin_inset Newline newline
6979 \begin_inset Newline newline
6987 \begin_inset Newline newline
6997 \begin_layout Standard
7004 makes the label emphasized and
7013 \begin_layout Standard
7014 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7022 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7023 lists until you change the definition.
7031 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7033 \begin_inset Index idx
7036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7037 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7045 \begin_layout Standard
7046 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7049 \begin_layout Enumerate
7050 \begin_inset Argument 1
7053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7072 \begin_inset Note Note
7075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7076 goes back to default numbering
7084 \begin_layout Enumerate
7088 \begin_layout Standard
7092 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7096 \begin_layout Standard
7097 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7102 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7103 to indicate that it is a resumed
7104 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7105 , but in the output.
7108 \begin_layout Standard
7109 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7117 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7126 \begin_layout Standard
7127 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7129 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7130 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7131 of a normal enumeration.
7132 There, insert the command
7135 \begin_layout Standard
7141 \begin_layout Standard
7146 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7150 \begin_layout Enumerate
7154 \begin_layout Enumerate
7158 \begin_layout Standard
7159 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7162 \begin_layout Enumerate
7163 \begin_inset Argument 1
7166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7182 This enumeration starts at 4
7185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7187 \begin_inset Index idx
7190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7199 \begin_layout Standard
7200 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7202 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7205 \begin_layout Itemize
7209 \begin_layout Itemize
7210 with standard spacing
7213 \begin_layout Standard
7214 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7216 Add there the command
7220 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7223 \begin_layout Itemize
7224 \begin_inset Argument 1
7227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7246 \begin_layout Itemize
7250 \begin_layout Itemize
7254 \begin_layout Standard
7255 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7262 \begin_inset Index idx
7265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7273 For more information see its documentation,
7274 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7284 \begin_layout Standard
7285 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7287 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7288 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7292 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7295 \begin_layout Enumerate
7296 \begin_inset Argument 1
7299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7307 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7320 \begin_layout Enumerate
7321 with negative indentation
7324 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7325 Further Customization
7326 \begin_inset Index idx
7329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7330 Lists ! Customization
7338 \begin_layout Standard
7339 You can also change the style of description lists.
7343 \begin_layout Standard
7349 \begin_layout Standard
7350 changes the description label font, the command
7353 \begin_layout Standard
7359 \begin_layout Standard
7360 sets the list style.
7363 \begin_layout Standard
7364 An example where the command
7367 \begin_layout Standard
7372 itshape, style=nextline
7375 \begin_layout Standard
7379 \begin_layout Description
7381 \begin_inset space ~
7385 \begin_inset Argument 1
7388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7394 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7396 itshape, style=nextline
7406 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7407 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7411 \begin_layout Description
7413 \begin_inset space ~
7416 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7417 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7418 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7421 \begin_layout Standard
7422 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7428 \begin_inset Index idx
7431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7439 For more information see its documentation
7440 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7450 \begin_layout Subsection
7452 \begin_inset Index idx
7455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7464 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7466 \begin_inset space ~
7469 Address: An Overview
7472 \begin_layout Standard
7473 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7474 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7482 \begin_inset space ~
7488 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7489 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7490 gags on the document.
7491 In contrast, you can use the
7498 \begin_inset space ~
7503 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7504 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7508 \begin_layout Standard
7509 Of course, you're not limited to using
7516 \begin_inset space ~
7525 \begin_inset space ~
7530 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7531 some European academic papers.
7534 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7536 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7538 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7545 \begin_layout Standard
7550 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7551 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7555 \begin_inset space ~
7560 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7561 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7562 Here's an example of each:
7565 \begin_layout Right Address
7567 \begin_inset Newline newline
7571 \begin_inset Newline newline
7575 \begin_inset Newline newline
7578 When is it? What is today?
7581 \begin_layout Standard
7585 \begin_inset space ~
7591 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7593 the largest block of text on a single line.
7594 Here's an example of the
7601 \begin_layout Address
7603 \begin_inset Newline newline
7606 Where do I send this
7607 \begin_inset Newline newline
7610 Your post office and country
7613 \begin_layout Standard
7614 As you can see, both
7621 \begin_inset space ~
7626 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7631 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7632 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7638 This makes sense, since
7646 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7647 Thus, you have to use
7654 arg "newline-insert newline"
7659 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7660 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7662 \begin_inset space ~
7666 \begin_inset space ~
7671 ) to start a new line in an
7678 \begin_inset space ~
7686 \begin_layout Subsection
7690 \begin_layout Standard
7691 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7692 or list of references.
7694 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7697 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7699 \begin_inset Index idx
7702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7711 \begin_layout Standard
7716 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7717 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7718 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7719 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7733 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7734 The book document classes ignores the
7738 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7742 in a letter document class.
7745 \begin_layout Standard
7750 environment does several things for you.
7751 First, it puts the centered label
7752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7760 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7762 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7763 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7764 the subsequent text.
7765 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7767 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7771 \begin_layout Standard
7772 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7776 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7777 The new paragraph will still be in the
7782 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7783 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7786 \begin_layout Standard
7787 \begin_inset Float figure
7792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7794 \begin_inset Graphics
7795 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7803 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7806 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7808 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7829 \begin_layout Standard
7830 We would love to demonstrate the
7834 environment, but since this document is in the
7835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7842 class, we can't do this.
7843 We inserted it therefore as figure
7844 \begin_inset space ~
7848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7850 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7855 If you have never heard of an
7856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7863 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7866 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7868 \begin_inset Index idx
7871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7880 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7887 \begin_layout Standard
7892 environment is used to list references.
7893 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7894 only use it at the end of the document.
7906 \begin_layout Standard
7907 When you first open a
7911 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7912 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7928 depending on the document class.
7929 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7930 Each paragraph of the
7934 environment is a bibliography entry.
7939 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7940 Each new paragraph is still in the
7947 \begin_layout Standard
7948 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7949 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7951 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7953 handling, have a look at section
7954 \begin_inset space ~
7958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7960 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7967 \begin_layout Subsection
7968 Special Environments
7971 \begin_layout Standard
7973 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7974 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7977 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7982 \begin_inset Index idx
7985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7995 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8002 \begin_layout Standard
8008 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8010 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8015 key as a fixed whitespace.
8019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8032 \begin_inset space ~
8037 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8055 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8058 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8061 arg "newline-insert newline"
8078 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8079 So, when you finish using the
8084 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8085 Also, you can nest the
8090 environment inside of others.
8093 \begin_layout Standard
8094 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8097 \begin_layout Itemize
8101 arg "newline-insert newline"
8104 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8105 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8109 \begin_inset space \space{}
8119 arg "newline-insert newline"
8125 \begin_layout Itemize
8129 arg "newline-insert newline"
8139 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8145 \begin_layout Itemize
8146 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8147 You must put at least one
8151 in any line you want blank.
8152 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8156 \begin_layout Itemize
8157 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8161 since that will insert
8166 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8169 arg "self-insert \""
8175 \begin_layout Standard
8179 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8183 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8187 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8191 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8195 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8196 printf("Hello World!
8201 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8205 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8209 \begin_layout Standard
8210 This is just the standard
8211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8222 \begin_layout Standard
8228 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8230 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8231 as if you used a typewriter.
8232 \begin_inset Index idx
8235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8236 Paragraph environments|)
8241 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8244 Program Code Listings
8249 \begin_inset space ~
8257 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8261 \begin_inset Index idx
8264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8273 \begin_layout Standard
8278 environment is similar to the
8283 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8284 computer console text.
8289 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8303 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8304 you can have empty lines.
8317 \begin_layout Itemize
8318 have a certain language and a text style
8321 \begin_layout Itemize
8322 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8323 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8324 and \SpecialChar TeX
8328 \begin_layout Standard
8329 Because of these properties
8333 works like a typewriter.
8337 \begin_layout Verbatim
8342 \begin_layout Verbatim
8346 The following 2 lines are empty:
8349 \begin_layout Verbatim
8353 \begin_layout Verbatim
8357 \begin_layout Verbatim
8359 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8364 \begin_layout Standard
8369 environment is identical to
8373 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8374 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8381 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8386 \begin_layout Section
8387 Nesting Environments
8388 \begin_inset Index idx
8391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8392 Nesting ! Environments
8398 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8407 \begin_layout Subsection
8411 \begin_layout Standard
8413 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8415 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8417 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8419 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8431 \begin_layout Enumerate
8435 \begin_layout Enumerate
8440 \begin_layout Enumerate
8444 \begin_layout Enumerate
8449 \begin_layout Enumerate
8453 \begin_layout Standard
8454 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8455 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8457 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8459 \begin_inset space ~
8463 \begin_inset space ~
8471 \begin_inset space ~
8475 \begin_inset space ~
8480 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8482 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8485 arg "depth-increment"
8491 arg "depth-decrement"
8505 arg "depth-increment"
8511 arg "depth-decrement"
8515 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8516 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8520 \begin_layout Standard
8521 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8522 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8523 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8524 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8525 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8528 \begin_layout Standard
8529 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8531 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8533 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8536 \begin_layout Subsection
8537 What You Can and Can't Nest
8540 \begin_layout Standard
8541 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8542 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8545 \begin_layout Standard
8546 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8547 than a simple yes or no.
8548 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8551 \begin_layout Itemize
8552 Completely unnestable
8555 \begin_layout Itemize
8556 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8560 \begin_layout Itemize
8561 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8565 \begin_layout Standard
8566 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8567 environments have them:
8570 \begin_layout Description
8571 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8572 Can't nest into them.
8576 \begin_layout Itemize
8582 \begin_layout Itemize
8588 \begin_layout Itemize
8594 \begin_layout Itemize
8600 \begin_layout Itemize
8607 \begin_layout Description
8609 \begin_inset space ~
8612 Nestable You can nest them.
8613 You can nest other things into them.
8617 \begin_layout Itemize
8623 \begin_layout Itemize
8629 \begin_layout Itemize
8635 \begin_layout Itemize
8641 \begin_layout Itemize
8647 \begin_layout Itemize
8653 \begin_layout Itemize
8659 \begin_layout Itemize
8666 \begin_layout Itemize
8672 \begin_layout Itemize
8679 \begin_layout Description
8680 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8681 You can't nest anything into them.
8685 \begin_layout Itemize
8691 \begin_layout Itemize
8697 \begin_layout Itemize
8703 \begin_layout Itemize
8709 \begin_layout Itemize
8715 \begin_layout Itemize
8721 \begin_layout Itemize
8727 \begin_layout Itemize
8733 \begin_layout Itemize
8739 \begin_layout Itemize
8745 \begin_layout Itemize
8751 \begin_layout Itemize
8757 \begin_layout Itemize
8763 \begin_layout Itemize
8767 \begin_inset space ~
8773 \begin_layout Itemize
8780 \begin_layout Standard
8781 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8789 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8799 \begin_inset space ~
8802 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8803 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8804 nested section headings violate this.
8812 \begin_layout Subsection
8813 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8814 \begin_inset Index idx
8817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8818 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8826 \begin_layout Standard
8827 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8828 affected by nesting anyhow.
8832 \begin_layout Itemize
8836 \begin_layout Itemize
8840 \begin_layout Itemize
8844 \begin_layout Standard
8846 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8854 Figures and tables in
8858 are not affected by this.
8863 Have a look at section
8864 \begin_inset space ~
8868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8870 reference "sec:Floats"
8874 for more information about
8881 \begin_layout Standard
8883 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8884 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8888 \begin_layout Standard
8889 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8897 of its own, it behaves just like a
8898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8905 paragraph environment.
8906 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8910 \begin_layout Standard
8911 Here's an example with a table:
8914 \begin_layout Enumerate
8919 \begin_layout Enumerate
8920 This is (a) and it's nested.
8924 \begin_layout Standard
8925 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8931 \begin_layout Standard
8933 \begin_inset Tabular
8934 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8935 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8936 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8937 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9021 \begin_layout Standard
9022 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9029 \begin_layout Enumerate
9031 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9035 \begin_layout Enumerate
9039 \begin_layout Standard
9040 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9043 \begin_layout Enumerate
9048 \begin_layout Enumerate
9049 This is (a) and it's nested.
9053 \begin_layout Standard
9054 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9060 \begin_layout Standard
9062 \begin_inset Tabular
9063 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9064 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9065 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9066 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9150 \begin_layout Standard
9151 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9157 \begin_layout Enumerate
9164 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9167 \begin_layout Enumerate
9171 \begin_layout Standard
9172 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9176 \begin_layout Standard
9177 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9180 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9183 \begin_layout Enumerate
9188 \begin_layout Enumerate
9189 This is (a) and it's nested.
9192 \begin_layout Standard
9193 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9199 \begin_layout Standard
9201 \begin_inset Tabular
9202 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9203 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9204 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9205 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9290 \begin_layout Standard
9291 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9297 \begin_layout Enumerate
9299 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9306 \begin_layout Enumerate
9310 \begin_layout Standard
9311 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9317 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9318 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9322 \begin_layout Subsection
9323 Usage and General Features
9326 \begin_layout Standard
9327 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9328 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9337 is the innermost possible depth.
9338 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9341 \begin_layout Enumerate
9342 level #1 – outermost
9346 \begin_layout Enumerate
9351 \begin_layout Enumerate
9356 \begin_layout Enumerate
9361 \begin_layout Itemize
9366 \begin_layout Itemize
9375 \begin_layout Standard
9376 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9377 both of them in the example.
9378 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9388 For example, if we tried to nest another
9393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9400 , we would get errors.
9403 \begin_layout Subsection
9405 \begin_inset Index idx
9408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9417 \begin_layout Standard
9418 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9419 We have several examples of nested environments.
9420 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9424 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9425 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9428 \begin_layout Labeling
9429 \labelwidthstring MMM
9430 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9439 \begin_layout Labeling
9440 \labelwidthstring MMM
9441 #2-a This is level #2.
9442 We created it by using
9445 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9451 arg "depth-increment"
9458 \begin_layout Labeling
9459 \labelwidthstring MMM
9460 #3-a This is level #3.
9461 This time, we just enter
9468 arg "depth-increment"
9472 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9476 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9482 arg "depth-increment"
9489 \begin_layout Standard
9494 environment, nested inside of
9495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9503 So, it's at level #4.
9504 We did this by entering
9507 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9513 arg "depth-increment"
9516 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9521 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9537 \begin_layout Standard
9542 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9545 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9551 \begin_layout Labeling
9552 \labelwidthstring MMM
9553 #4-a This is level #4.
9557 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9560 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9565 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9569 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9574 keep nesting things inside
9575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9586 \begin_layout Labeling
9587 \labelwidthstring MMM
9588 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9593 \begin_layout Labeling
9594 \labelwidthstring MMM
9595 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9596 and this is level #6.
9597 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9601 \begin_layout Labeling
9602 \labelwidthstring MMM
9603 #5-b Back to level #5.
9607 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9613 arg "depth-decrement"
9620 \begin_layout Labeling
9621 \labelwidthstring MMM
9625 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9631 arg "depth-decrement"
9634 , we're back at level #4.
9638 \begin_layout Labeling
9639 \labelwidthstring MMM
9640 #3-b Back to level #3.
9641 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9645 \begin_layout Labeling
9646 \labelwidthstring MMM
9647 #2-b Back to level #2.
9652 \begin_layout Labeling
9653 \labelwidthstring MMM
9654 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9655 After this sentence, we will enter
9659 and change the paragraph environment back to
9666 \begin_layout Standard
9667 We could have also used the
9683 environment in place of the
9688 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9691 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9692 Example 2: Inheritance
9695 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9696 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9699 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9708 arg "depth-increment"
9712 \begin_inset Newline newline
9715 which, we will change to the
9723 \begin_layout Enumerate
9728 environment, at level #2.
9731 \begin_layout Enumerate
9732 Notice how the nested
9736 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9740 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9744 \begin_layout Standard
9745 We ended this example by entering
9750 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9754 and reset the nesting depth by using
9757 arg "depth-decrement"
9763 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9764 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9773 \begin_inset Argument 1
9776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9777 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9785 \begin_layout Enumerate
9786 This is level #1, in an
9790 paragraph environment.
9791 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9795 \begin_layout Enumerate
9800 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9806 arg "depth-increment"
9810 Now, what happens if we nest an
9814 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9815 label be? An asterisk?
9819 \begin_layout Itemize
9829 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9830 So, its label is a bullet.
9831 (We got here by using
9834 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9840 arg "depth-increment"
9843 , then changing the environment to
9851 \begin_layout Itemize
9852 Here's level #4, produced using
9855 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9861 arg "depth-increment"
9865 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9870 \begin_layout Enumerate
9873 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9878 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9882 , because we are in the
9890 environment (that is, it is an
9905 \begin_layout Enumerate
9910 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9911 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9915 \begin_layout Enumerate
9916 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9919 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9922 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9925 \begin_layout Enumerate
9929 arg "depth-decrement"
9932 to decrease the depth after the next
9935 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9942 \begin_layout Enumerate
9944 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9949 \begin_layout Enumerate
9951 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9952 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9956 \begin_layout Enumerate
9957 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9966 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9971 reset the counter for the label.
9975 \begin_layout Enumerate
9979 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9985 arg "depth-decrement"
9988 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9989 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9990 into the twofold-nested
9998 \begin_layout Enumerate
9999 The same thing happens if we do another
10002 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10008 arg "depth-decrement"
10011 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10014 \begin_layout Standard
10015 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10020 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10031 The number of other
10035 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10042 The same rule applies for the
10046 environment, as well.
10049 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10050 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10053 \begin_layout Enumerate
10054 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10055 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10056 the same detail with how we did it.
10065 \begin_layout Standard
10073 arg "depth-increment"
10080 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10081 the example in parentheses someplace.
10082 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10083 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10084 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10088 \begin_layout Enumerate
10093 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10097 \begin_layout Verse
10098 Now we will add verse.
10099 \begin_inset Newline newline
10102 It will get much worse.
10103 \begin_inset Newline newline
10113 arg "depth-increment"
10123 \begin_layout Verse
10124 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10125 \begin_inset Newline newline
10128 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10129 \begin_inset Newline newline
10135 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10143 \begin_layout Verse
10144 Here comes a table:
10148 \begin_layout Standard
10149 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10155 \begin_layout Standard
10157 \begin_inset Tabular
10158 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10159 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10160 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10161 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10246 \begin_layout Verse
10250 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10260 arg "depth-increment"
10266 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10272 \begin_inset Newline newline
10280 arg "depth-decrement"
10287 \begin_layout Enumerate
10292 : level #1) This is another item.
10293 Note that selecting a
10297 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10298 3 times to put the table inside the
10306 \begin_layout Quotation
10307 We're now ending the
10311 list and changing to
10316 We're still at level #1.
10317 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10318 The next set of paragraphs is a
10319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10326 We will nest both the
10333 \begin_inset space ~
10338 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10342 for the letter body.
10346 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10349 to preserve the depth.
10350 Remember that you need to use
10353 arg "newline-insert newline"
10356 to create multiple lines inside the
10363 \begin_inset space ~
10373 \begin_layout Right Address
10375 \begin_inset Newline newline
10378 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10379 \begin_inset Newline newline
10385 \begin_layout Address
10387 \begin_inset space ~
10393 \begin_layout Quotation
10394 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10398 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10399 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10400 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10401 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10402 as soon as possible.
10403 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10406 \begin_layout Quotation
10407 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10408 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10409 with your order, along with payment.
10412 \begin_layout Quotation
10413 We thank you again for your patience.
10416 \begin_layout Address
10418 \begin_inset Newline newline
10425 \begin_layout Quotation
10426 That ends that example!
10429 \begin_layout Standard
10430 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10431 gives you a lot of power with just
10433 We could have easily nested an
10454 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10457 \begin_layout Subsection
10459 \begin_inset Index idx
10462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10463 Nesting ! Separation
10469 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10471 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10478 \begin_layout Standard
10479 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10481 For example you need two different enumerations:
10484 \begin_layout Enumerate
10489 \begin_layout Enumerate
10494 \begin_layout Enumerate
10498 \begin_layout Standard
10499 \begin_inset Separator plain
10505 \begin_layout Itemize
10511 \begin_layout Standard
10512 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10518 \begin_layout Enumerate
10522 \begin_layout Enumerate
10526 \begin_layout Enumerate
10530 \begin_layout Standard
10531 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10532 list item and use the menu
10534 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10535 Separated <Name> Above
10539 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10540 Separated <Name> Below
10543 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10544 ) and before or behind it the
10546 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10549 \begin_layout Standard
10550 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10551 (red arrow in LyX).
10552 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10553 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10556 \begin_layout Standard
10557 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10560 arg "paragraph-break"
10567 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10570 \begin_layout Section
10571 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10572 \begin_inset Index idx
10575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10584 \begin_layout Standard
10585 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10586 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10588 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10589 be broken at the end of a line.
10590 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10594 \begin_layout Subsection
10596 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10598 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10603 \begin_inset Index idx
10606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10615 \begin_layout Standard
10616 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10617 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10618 ) not to break the line at
10620 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10623 \begin_layout Quote
10624 Further documentation is given in section
10625 \begin_inset Newline newline
10629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10631 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10639 \begin_layout Standard
10640 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10655 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10664 A protected space is set with
10666 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10667 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10669 \begin_inset space ~
10677 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10683 \begin_layout Subsection
10685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10687 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10692 \begin_inset Index idx
10695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10696 Spacing ! Horizontal
10704 \begin_layout Standard
10705 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10707 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10708 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10712 The length units are listed in Appendix
10713 \begin_inset space ~
10717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10719 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10726 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10730 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10735 \begin_inset Index idx
10738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10739 Spaces ! Inter-word
10747 \begin_layout Standard
10748 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10749 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10750 at the ends of sentences.
10751 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10752 automatically takes care about this.
10753 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10754 followed by a period; see section
10755 \begin_inset space ~
10759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10761 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10766 To insert a normal space, select
10768 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10769 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10771 \begin_inset space ~
10779 arg "space-insert normal"
10785 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10787 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10789 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10794 \begin_inset Index idx
10797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10806 \begin_layout Standard
10808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10815 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10824 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10825 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10826 inside abbreviations:
10829 \begin_layout Quote
10831 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10835 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10838 \begin_layout Standard
10839 or between values and units.
10840 Compare for example this:
10841 \begin_inset Newline newline
10845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10849 \begin_inset Newline newline
10852 10 kg (normal space
10855 \begin_layout Standard
10856 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10858 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10859 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10861 \begin_inset space ~
10869 arg "space-insert thin"
10875 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10879 \begin_layout Standard
10880 You can also insert the following space types:
10883 \begin_layout Description
10885 \begin_inset space ~
10889 \begin_inset space ~
10892 space A line with a
10893 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10897 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10901 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10904 negative thin space between the arrows.
10907 \begin_layout Description
10909 \begin_inset space ~
10913 \begin_inset space ~
10916 space A line with a
10917 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10921 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10925 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10928 negative medium space between the arrows.
10931 \begin_layout Description
10933 \begin_inset space ~
10937 \begin_inset space ~
10940 space A line with a
10941 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10945 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10949 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10952 negative thick space between the arrows.
10955 \begin_layout Description
10957 \begin_inset space ~
10961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10965 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10969 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10973 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10977 \begin_inset space ~
10981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10984 em) space between the arrows.
10987 \begin_layout Description
10989 \begin_inset space ~
10993 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10997 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11001 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11005 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11009 \begin_inset space ~
11013 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11016 em) space between the arrows.
11019 \begin_layout Description
11021 \begin_inset space ~
11025 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11029 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11033 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11037 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11041 \begin_inset space ~
11045 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11048 em) space between the arrows.
11051 \begin_layout Description
11053 \begin_inset space ~
11057 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11061 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11066 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11070 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11073 cm space between the arrows.
11076 \begin_layout Standard
11078 \begin_inset space ~
11082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11084 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11088 lists the different space sizes.
11091 \begin_layout Standard
11092 \begin_inset Float table
11097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11098 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11103 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11107 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11117 \begin_inset Tabular
11118 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11119 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11120 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11121 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11185 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11233 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11237 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11332 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11345 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11360 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11394 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11396 \begin_inset Index idx
11399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11408 \begin_layout Standard
11409 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11410 feature for adding extra space
11411 in a uniform fashion.
11412 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11413 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11414 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11415 equally between themselves.
11418 \begin_layout Standard
11419 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11422 \begin_layout Quote
11424 This is on the left side
11425 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11428 This is on the right
11431 \begin_layout Quote
11434 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11438 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11444 \begin_layout Quote
11447 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11451 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11455 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11461 \begin_layout Standard
11462 That was an example in the
11468 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11472 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11476 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11479 is one in a standard paragraph.
11480 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11484 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11487 \begin_layout Standard
11488 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11491 \begin_inset space ~
11496 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11499 \begin_layout Standard
11501 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11505 \begin_inset space ~
11511 \begin_layout Standard
11513 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11517 \begin_inset space ~
11523 \begin_layout Standard
11525 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11529 \begin_inset space ~
11535 \begin_layout Standard
11537 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11541 \begin_inset space ~
11547 \begin_layout Standard
11549 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11553 \begin_inset space ~
11559 \begin_layout Standard
11561 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11565 \begin_inset space ~
11571 \begin_layout Standard
11572 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11580 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11584 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11586 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11587 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11591 option in the space dialog.
11599 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11603 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11608 \begin_inset Index idx
11611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11620 \begin_layout Standard
11621 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11622 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11625 \begin_layout Standard
11626 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11629 What is correct English?:
11630 \begin_inset Newline newline
11634 \begin_inset Newline newline
11638 \begin_inset space ~
11641 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11642 \begin_inset Newline newline
11646 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11657 \begin_inset Newline newline
11661 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11672 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11678 \begin_layout Standard
11680 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11685 \begin_inset space ~
11689 \begin_inset space ~
11693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11697 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11699 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11700 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11704 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11710 \begin_inset space ~
11714 \begin_inset space ~
11718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11721 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11730 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11731 That is why it is named
11732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11740 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11741 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11745 \begin_layout Subsection
11747 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11749 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11754 \begin_inset Index idx
11757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11766 \begin_layout Standard
11767 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11769 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11770 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11772 \begin_inset space ~
11778 There you find the following sizes:
11781 \begin_layout Standard
11794 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11795 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11800 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11802 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11803 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11805 \begin_inset space ~
11811 \begin_inset Index idx
11814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11815 Document ! Settings
11820 for the paragraph separation.
11821 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11832 \begin_layout Standard
11838 \begin_inset Index idx
11841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11847 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11848 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11853 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11854 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11863 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11872 s are described in section
11873 \begin_inset space ~
11877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11879 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11888 If there are several
11892 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11893 You can therefore use
11897 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11900 \begin_layout Standard
11905 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11906 \begin_inset space ~
11910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11912 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11919 \begin_layout Standard
11920 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11930 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11931 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11943 \begin_layout Subsection
11944 Paragraph Alignment
11945 \begin_inset Index idx
11948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11949 Paragraph ! Alignment
11957 \begin_layout Standard
11958 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11960 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11963 dialog (toolbar button
11966 arg "layout-paragraph"
11970 There are five possibilities:
11973 \begin_layout Itemize
11981 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11987 \begin_layout Itemize
11995 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12001 \begin_layout Itemize
12009 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12015 \begin_layout Itemize
12023 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12029 \begin_layout Itemize
12037 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12043 \begin_layout Standard
12044 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12045 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12046 the left and right margins.
12047 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12050 \begin_layout Standard
12052 This paragraph is right aligned,
12055 \begin_layout Standard
12057 this one is centered,
12060 \begin_layout Standard
12062 this one is left aligned.
12065 \begin_layout Subsection
12067 \begin_inset Index idx
12070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12071 Page breaks ! Forced
12077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12079 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12086 \begin_layout Standard
12087 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12088 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12089 force a page break where you want one.
12090 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12091 is good at page breaking.
12092 Only if you use a lot of
12096 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12097 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12100 \begin_layout Standard
12101 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12102 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12106 have to change the page breaking.
12109 \begin_layout Standard
12110 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12112 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12114 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12115 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12117 \begin_inset space ~
12123 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12125 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12126 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12128 \begin_inset space ~
12133 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12135 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12136 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12139 \begin_layout Standard
12140 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12141 at the top of a page.
12142 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12144 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12145 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12146 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12150 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12154 to learn more about
12161 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12163 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12165 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12170 \begin_inset Index idx
12173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12174 Page breaks ! Clear
12182 \begin_layout Standard
12183 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12184 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12185 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12186 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12187 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12190 \begin_layout Standard
12191 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12193 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12194 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12196 \begin_inset space ~
12202 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12204 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12205 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12207 \begin_inset space ~
12211 \begin_inset space ~
12216 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12217 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12220 \begin_layout Subsection
12222 \begin_inset Index idx
12225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12234 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12241 \begin_layout Standard
12242 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12244 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12246 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12247 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12249 \begin_inset space ~
12253 \begin_inset space ~
12261 arg "newline-insert newline"
12265 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12267 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12268 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12270 \begin_inset space ~
12274 \begin_inset space ~
12282 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12285 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12287 This is useful to avoid
12288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12295 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12298 \begin_layout Standard
12299 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12300 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12302 very good at line breaking.
12303 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12304 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12305 \begin_inset space ~
12309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12311 reference "sec:Quote"
12316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12318 reference "sec:Verse"
12323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12325 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12332 \begin_layout Subsection
12334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12336 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12341 \begin_inset Index idx
12344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12353 \begin_layout Standard
12355 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12366 \begin_layout Standard
12370 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12371 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12373 \begin_inset space ~
12378 you can insert horizontal lines.
12379 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12380 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12381 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12384 \begin_layout Standard
12386 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12397 \begin_layout Section
12398 Characters and Symbols
12401 \begin_layout Standard
12402 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12403 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12404 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12406 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12412 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12416 for information on how this is done.
12419 \begin_layout Standard
12420 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12425 dialog via the menu
12427 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12428 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12434 \begin_layout Standard
12435 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12443 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12444 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12446 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12454 \begin_layout Section
12455 Fonts and Text Styles
12456 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12458 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12465 \begin_layout Subsection
12467 \begin_inset Index idx
12470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12479 \begin_layout Standard
12480 There are two types of fonts:
12483 \begin_layout Description
12485 \begin_inset space ~
12489 \begin_inset Index idx
12492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12498 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12503 characters) in the font.
12504 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12505 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12506 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12507 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12508 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12509 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12510 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12511 \begin_inset Newline newline
12514 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12515 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12516 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12517 sizes than at small ones.
12518 \begin_inset Newline newline
12532 \begin_inset space ~
12540 \begin_layout Description
12542 \begin_inset space ~
12546 \begin_inset Index idx
12549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12555 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12556 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12557 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12558 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12559 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12560 image manipulation program.
12561 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12562 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12563 \begin_inset space ~
12566 pixels high up to 34
12567 \begin_inset space ~
12570 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12571 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12572 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12574 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12575 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12576 \begin_inset Newline newline
12579 Bitmap fonts are named
12582 \begin_inset space ~
12587 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12590 \begin_layout Standard
12591 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12592 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12593 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12594 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12595 use scalable fonts.
12598 \begin_layout Standard
12599 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12602 \begin_layout Standard
12603 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12604 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12605 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12606 font to emphasize text, you use an
12607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12615 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12617 In \SpecialChar LyX
12618 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12622 \begin_layout Subsection
12625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12627 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12634 \begin_layout Standard
12635 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12636 used its own fonts.
12637 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12638 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12641 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12642 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12643 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12644 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12645 to a word processor.
12646 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12647 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12648 files are very portable across
12649 different machines.
12650 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12651 has increased a lot
12652 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12655 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12657 \begin_inset space ~
12661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12663 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12668 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12669 code in the document
12670 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12673 \begin_layout Standard
12674 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12675 engines that are also able directly
12676 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12678 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12680 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12682 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12683 that is installed on your system.
12684 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12687 \begin_layout Standard
12688 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12696 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12697 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12705 \begin_layout Subsection
12706 Document Font and Font size
12707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12709 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12714 \begin_inset Index idx
12717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12724 \begin_inset Index idx
12727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12736 \begin_layout Standard
12737 You can set the document fonts in the
12739 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12743 \begin_inset Index idx
12746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12747 Document ! Settings
12757 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12758 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12761 \begin_inset space ~
12770 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12772 \begin_inset space ~
12775 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12778 \begin_layout Standard
12783 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12784 This requires that you use
12796 as the output format, i.
12797 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12801 \begin_inset space \space{}
12804 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12805 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12806 installed (see section
12807 \begin_inset space ~
12811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12813 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12818 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12820 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12821 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12823 \begin_inset space ~
12826 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12827 cannot determine the family.
12828 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12829 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12832 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12835 \begin_layout Standard
12836 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12837 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12842 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12848 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12849 With LyX's default font encoding, this is a look-alike of the standard
12852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12858 \begin_inset space ~
12864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12889 European Computer Modern
12892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12900 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12903 \begin_layout Standard
12908 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12909 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12914 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12917 \begin_inset space ~
12922 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12928 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12929 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12932 \begin_layout Itemize
12936 \begin_inset space ~
12941 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12954 \begin_inset space ~
12959 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12960 community in order to replace
12964 as the default font.
12965 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12966 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12969 \begin_inset space ~
12982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12983 One difference is improved kerning.
12991 \begin_layout Itemize
12992 If you do not like the look of
13000 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13001 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13005 \begin_inset space ~
13011 \begin_inset space ~
13021 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13022 \begin_inset space ~
13025 serif and typewriter fonts,
13029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13030 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13037 \begin_inset space ~
13046 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13047 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13051 \begin_inset space \space{}
13059 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13063 \begin_inset space \space{}
13069 \begin_inset space ~
13077 \begin_inset space ~
13087 but you can also select your own.
13088 \begin_inset Newline newline
13091 The differences between roman,
13094 \begin_inset space ~
13103 fonts are explained in section
13104 \begin_inset space ~
13108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13110 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13115 \begin_inset Newline newline
13121 \begin_inset space ~
13126 was originally designed for newspapers.
13127 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13128 into the small newspaper columns.
13132 \begin_inset space ~
13137 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13140 \begin_layout Standard
13141 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13154 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13159 depends on the class you are using.
13160 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13163 \begin_layout Standard
13164 Note that the font size is the
13169 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13170 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13171 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13172 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13175 \begin_inset space ~
13181 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13182 \begin_inset space ~
13186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13188 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13195 \begin_layout Standard
13199 \begin_inset space ~
13204 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13206 \begin_inset space ~
13209 serif or typewriter.
13214 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13224 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13227 \begin_layout Standard
13232 LaTeX font encoding
13234 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13235 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13241 \begin_inset Index idx
13244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13252 \begin_inset space ~
13256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13258 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13263 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13264 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13271 \begin_layout Standard
13272 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13274 Use Old Style Figures
13278 Use True Small Caps
13281 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13284 Use Old Style Figures
13286 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13288 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13296 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13300 Use True Small Caps
13302 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13303 of scaled capitals.
13304 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13305 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13308 \begin_layout Standard
13313 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13314 a font to display the script characters.
13318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13319 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13325 \begin_inset Index idx
13328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13335 So this has no effect for the document language
13351 \begin_layout Standard
13354 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13356 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13357 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13363 \begin_inset Index idx
13366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13368 packages ! microtype
13377 \begin_layout Standard
13380 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13382 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13387 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13388 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13394 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13395 \begin_inset space ~
13399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13401 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13411 \begin_layout Standard
13412 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13416 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13424 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13429 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13430 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13432 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13434 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13437 dialog, see section
13438 \begin_inset space ~
13442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13444 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13456 \begin_layout Subsection
13460 \begin_layout Standard
13461 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13462 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13464 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13465 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13466 choose a math font in the dialog
13468 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13472 \begin_inset Index idx
13475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13476 Document ! Settings
13482 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13483 automatically selects a math font.
13484 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13485 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13494 \begin_inset space ~
13500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13505 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13506 document font is available.
13509 \begin_layout Standard
13510 Note that the math font will not be used for
13514 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13520 or by the insertion of the command
13527 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13528 \begin_inset space ~
13532 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13533 while the math characters do not.
13535 \begin_inset space ~
13538 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13541 \begin_inset space ~
13549 \begin_inset space ~
13554 in the document font settings.
13557 \begin_layout Standard
13558 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13559 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13560 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13561 font (in most cases
13562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13568 \begin_inset space ~
13574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13577 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13578 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13586 \begin_inset space ~
13592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13598 \begin_layout Subsection
13599 Using Different Character Styles
13600 \begin_inset Index idx
13603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13610 \begin_inset Index idx
13613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13622 \begin_layout Standard
13623 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13624 automatically changes the character style for certain
13625 paragraph environments.
13627 supports two character styles,
13636 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13640 \begin_layout Standard
13645 style, do one of the following:
13648 \begin_layout Itemize
13649 click on the toolbar button
13658 \begin_layout Itemize
13659 use the key binding
13668 \begin_layout Standard
13669 These commands are all toggles.
13674 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13677 \begin_layout Standard
13678 One typically uses the
13682 style for proper names.
13684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13691 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13699 \begin_layout Standard
13700 A more widely used character style is the
13705 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13712 \begin_layout Itemize
13713 clicking on the toolbar button
13722 \begin_layout Itemize
13723 using the keybindings
13732 \begin_layout Standard
13737 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13739 use a different font.
13742 \begin_layout Standard
13743 We've been using the
13747 style all over the place in this document.
13748 Here's one more example:
13751 \begin_layout Quotation
13754 Do not overuse character styles!
13757 \begin_layout Standard
13758 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13759 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13760 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13761 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13765 \begin_layout Standard
13766 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13774 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13776 \begin_inset space ~
13779 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13785 arg "dialog-show character"
13791 \begin_layout Subsection
13792 Fine-Tuning with the
13797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13799 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13804 \begin_inset Index idx
13807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13816 \begin_layout Standard
13817 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13819 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13820 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13821 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13822 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13823 from ordinary dialog.
13826 \begin_layout Standard
13827 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13828 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13829 \begin_inset Newline newline
13832 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13833 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13836 \begin_layout Standard
13837 To use custom character styles, open the
13839 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13841 \begin_inset space ~
13844 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13847 dialog or press the toolbar button
13850 arg "dialog-show character"
13854 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13855 font property that you can choose.
13856 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13859 \begin_inset space ~
13864 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13869 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13870 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13871 environments all at once.
13874 \begin_layout Standard
13875 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13878 \begin_inset space ~
13890 \begin_layout Labeling
13891 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13905 The possible options are:
13909 \begin_layout Labeling
13910 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13915 This is the Roman font family.
13916 Normally a serif font.
13917 It's also the default family.
13927 \begin_layout Labeling
13928 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13932 \begin_inset space ~
13939 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13951 \begin_layout Labeling
13952 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13959 This is the Typewriter font family.
13965 arg "font-typewriter"
13974 \begin_layout Labeling
13975 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13980 This corresponds to the print weight.
13985 \begin_layout Labeling
13986 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13991 This is the Medium font series.
13992 It's also the default series.
13995 \begin_layout Labeling
13996 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14003 This is the Bold font series.
14016 \begin_layout Labeling
14017 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14022 As the name implies.
14027 \begin_layout Labeling
14028 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14033 This is the Upright font shape.
14034 It's also the default shape.
14037 \begin_layout Labeling
14038 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14052 s the Italic font shape
14058 \begin_layout Labeling
14059 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14066 This is the Slanted font shape
14068 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14069 , this is different from italic).
14072 \begin_layout Labeling
14073 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14077 \begin_inset space ~
14084 This is the Small caps font shape
14091 \begin_layout Labeling
14092 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14097 Alters the text color.
14098 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14102 \begin_inset space ~
14107 , which means that the document default color set in
14109 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14110 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14116 \begin_inset space ~
14121 is used, you can choose between
14198 \begin_inset Index idx
14201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14210 \begin_layout Labeling
14211 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14216 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14217 the language of the document.
14218 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14219 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14221 \begin_inset Newline newline
14224 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14226 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14227 When using the spell checking (see section
14228 \begin_inset space ~
14232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14234 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14238 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14241 \begin_layout Labeling
14242 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14247 Alters the size of the font.
14248 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14249 proportional to the document font size.
14250 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14251 the details, but a general description of what
14257 \begin_layout Labeling
14258 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14279 arg "font-size tiny"
14285 \begin_layout Labeling
14286 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14307 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14313 \begin_layout Labeling
14314 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14335 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14341 \begin_layout Labeling
14342 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14363 arg "font-size small"
14369 \begin_layout Labeling
14370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14384 It's also the default size.
14388 arg "font-size normal"
14394 \begin_layout Labeling
14395 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14416 arg "font-size large"
14422 \begin_layout Labeling
14423 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14444 arg "font-size larger"
14450 \begin_layout Labeling
14451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14472 arg "font-size largest"
14478 \begin_layout Labeling
14479 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14500 arg "font-size huge"
14506 \begin_layout Labeling
14507 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14528 arg "font-size giant"
14534 \begin_layout Labeling
14535 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14540 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14560 arg "font-size increase"
14566 \begin_layout Labeling
14567 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14572 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14592 arg "font-size decrease"
14599 \begin_layout Standard
14604 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14605 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14607 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14608 — use those instead.
14609 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14612 \begin_layout Labeling
14613 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14618 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14623 \begin_layout Labeling
14624 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14631 This is text with emphasize on
14634 This might seem like the same as
14638 , but it is actually a bit different.
14644 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14646 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14649 \begin_layout Labeling
14650 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14657 This is text with Underbar on.
14663 arg "font-underline"
14669 \begin_inset Newline newline
14674 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14675 when you could not change fonts.
14676 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14677 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14678 because some people
14682 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14685 \begin_layout Labeling
14686 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14690 \begin_inset space ~
14697 This is text with Double underbar on.
14703 arg "font-underunderline"
14707 \begin_inset Newline newline
14710 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14711 about double underbar.
14714 \begin_layout Labeling
14715 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14719 \begin_inset space ~
14726 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14732 arg "font-underwave"
14736 \begin_inset Newline newline
14739 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14740 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14743 \begin_layout Labeling
14744 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14748 \begin_inset space ~
14755 This is text with Strikeout on.
14761 arg "font-strikeout"
14765 \begin_inset Newline newline
14768 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14769 changed in the meantime.
14772 \begin_layout Labeling
14773 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14777 \begin_inset space ~
14784 This is text with Cross out on.
14787 \begin_inset Newline newline
14790 This is used to make text hardly readable.
14793 \begin_layout Labeling
14794 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14801 This is text with Noun on.
14808 , this is a logical attribute.
14809 Normally it's equivalent to
14812 \begin_inset space ~
14821 \begin_layout Standard
14822 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14823 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14825 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14827 \begin_inset space ~
14830 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14836 arg "dialog-show character"
14839 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14840 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14843 arg "textstyle-apply"
14847 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14851 \begin_layout Standard
14852 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14859 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14860 (suppose you just set the shape to
14861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14879 \begin_inset space ~
14891 \begin_layout Standard
14892 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14900 \begin_inset space ~
14912 \begin_layout Itemize
14918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14925 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14943 \begin_inset Newline newline
14947 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14961 \begin_inset Note Note
14964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14965 For more on phantoms see section
14966 \begin_inset space ~
14970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14972 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14982 \begin_inset Newline newline
14988 \begin_layout Itemize
14993 fonts use characters with serifs.
14994 These are the small
14995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15002 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15003 The following example shows the difference:
15004 \begin_inset Newline newline
15008 \begin_inset Newline newline
15013 text without serifs
15016 \begin_inset Newline newline
15019 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15020 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15027 \begin_layout Itemize
15032 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15033 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15034 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15037 \begin_layout Standard
15038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15045 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15046 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15049 \begin_inset space ~
15054 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15055 the property to be removed.
15056 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15057 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15058 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15076 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15077 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15085 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15089 \begin_inset space ~
15094 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15105 If you, for example, set
15106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15124 \begin_inset space ~
15129 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15138 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15141 \begin_layout Standard
15142 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15143 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15146 \begin_layout Section
15147 Printing and Previewing
15150 \begin_layout Subsection
15154 \begin_layout Standard
15155 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15156 using \SpecialChar LyX
15157 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15158 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15159 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15160 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15162 Additional Features
15167 \begin_layout Standard
15169 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15172 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15173 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15174 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15177 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15178 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15179 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15180 to turn your writing into printable output.
15181 This happens in two stages:
15184 \begin_layout Enumerate
15185 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15186 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15188 a file with the extension,
15189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15203 \begin_layout Enumerate
15204 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15205 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15206 to use the commands in the
15210 file to produce printable output.
15213 \begin_layout Subsection
15214 Output file formats
15215 \begin_inset Index idx
15218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15227 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15234 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15235 Simple text (ASCII)
15236 \begin_inset Index idx
15239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15240 File formats ! ASCII
15248 \begin_layout Standard
15249 This file type has the extension
15250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15262 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15266 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15273 \begin_layout Standard
15274 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15276 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15277 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15279 \begin_inset space ~
15285 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15286 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15287 bibliography (section
15288 \begin_inset space ~
15292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15294 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15299 If your document includes such material, use
15301 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15302 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15304 \begin_inset space ~
15308 \begin_inset space ~
15312 \begin_inset space ~
15320 \begin_inset space ~
15324 \begin_inset space ~
15330 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15331 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15337 \begin_inset Index idx
15340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15341 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15350 \begin_layout Standard
15351 This file type has the extension
15352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15363 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15366 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15367 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15368 -Errors or to process it manually
15369 with console commands.
15370 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15371 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15372 's temporary directory whenever you
15373 view or export your document.
15376 \begin_layout Standard
15377 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15378 -file using the menu
15380 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15381 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15385 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15386 export variants are explained in section
15387 \begin_inset space ~
15391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15393 reference "subsec:Export"
15400 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15402 \begin_inset Index idx
15405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15414 \begin_layout Standard
15415 This file type has the extension
15416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15436 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15437 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15438 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15442 \begin_layout Standard
15443 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15444 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15445 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15446 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15447 when you view the DVI.
15448 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15451 \begin_layout Standard
15452 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15454 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15455 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15460 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15461 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15463 \begin_inset space ~
15469 The latter option uses the program
15471 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15477 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15480 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15481 font access (see section
15482 \begin_inset space ~
15486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15488 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15493 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15494 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15499 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15501 \begin_inset Index idx
15504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15505 File formats ! PostScript
15513 \begin_layout Standard
15514 This file type has the extension
15515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15527 PostScript was developed by the company
15531 as a printer language.
15532 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15534 PostScript can be seen as a
15535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15538 programming language
15539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15542 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15547 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15554 \begin_inset Index idx
15557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15559 packages ! pstricks
15569 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15572 \begin_layout Standard
15573 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15577 Encapsulated PostScript
15578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15581 (EPS, file extension
15582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15594 As \SpecialChar LyX
15595 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15596 convert them in the background to EPS.
15597 If, for example, you have 50
15598 \begin_inset space ~
15601 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15603 \begin_inset space ~
15606 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15607 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15609 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15610 EPS to avoid this problem.
15613 \begin_layout Standard
15614 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15616 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15617 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15623 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15625 \begin_inset Index idx
15628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15635 \begin_inset Index idx
15638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15647 \begin_layout Standard
15648 This file type has the extension
15649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15665 Portable Document Format
15666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15673 was derived from PostScript.
15674 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15683 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15684 looks exactly the same.
15687 \begin_layout Standard
15688 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15692 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15696 (JPG, file extension
15697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15724 Portable Network Graphics
15725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15728 (PNG, file extension
15729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15741 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15742 converts them in the
15743 background to one of these formats.
15744 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15745 will slow down your workflow.
15746 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15749 \begin_layout Standard
15750 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15752 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15758 \begin_layout Description
15760 \begin_inset space ~
15763 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15767 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15770 \begin_layout Description
15772 \begin_inset space ~
15779 ) This uses the program
15781 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15784 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15787 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15790 is a new engine, derived from
15794 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15795 access (see section
15796 \begin_inset space ~
15800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15802 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15807 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15808 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15813 \begin_layout Description
15815 \begin_inset space ~
15822 ) This uses the program
15827 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15833 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15834 font access (see section
15835 \begin_inset space ~
15839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15841 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15846 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15847 vertically written Japanese.
15850 \begin_layout Description
15852 \begin_inset space ~
15855 (cropped) This is the same as
15858 \begin_inset space ~
15863 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15864 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15865 to generate good-looking
15866 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15869 \begin_layout Description
15871 \begin_inset space ~
15874 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15878 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15882 \begin_layout Description
15884 \begin_inset space ~
15887 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15891 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15892 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15896 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15897 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15900 \begin_layout Standard
15904 \begin_inset space ~
15913 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15914 works without problems.
15915 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15916 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15920 \begin_inset space ~
15928 \begin_inset space ~
15933 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15941 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15943 \begin_inset Index idx
15946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15947 FileFormats ! XHTML
15953 \begin_inset Index idx
15956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15965 \begin_layout Standard
15966 This file type has the extension
15967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15979 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15980 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15981 When \SpecialChar LyX
15982 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15983 suitable for the purpose.
15984 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15986 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15987 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15990 between different formats, which are described in section
15992 Math Output in XHTML
15997 \begin_inset space ~
16005 \begin_layout Standard
16006 XHTML output remains
16007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16014 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16015 features are supported yet.
16019 and the World Wide Web
16023 Additional Features
16025 manual, for more information.
16028 \begin_layout Standard
16029 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16031 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16032 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16038 \begin_layout Subsection
16040 \begin_inset Index idx
16043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16052 \begin_layout Standard
16053 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16054 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16063 or use the toolbar button
16070 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16071 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16072 \begin_inset space ~
16076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16078 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16082 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16084 \begin_inset space ~
16088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16090 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16095 Further output formats can be selected via
16097 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16098 View (Other Formats)
16100 or the toolbar button
16109 \begin_layout Standard
16110 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16111 viewer window using the menu
16113 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16118 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16119 Update (Other Formats)
16124 \begin_layout Standard
16125 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16128 To have a real output, export your document.
16131 \begin_layout Section
16132 A few Words about Typography
16133 \begin_inset Index idx
16136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16145 \begin_layout Subsection
16146 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16147 \begin_inset Index idx
16150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16157 \begin_inset Index idx
16160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16169 \begin_layout Standard
16170 In \SpecialChar LyX
16172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16183 symbol comes in four variants: the
16200 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16206 \begin_layout Standard
16207 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16217 height_special "totalheight"
16222 backgroundcolor "none"
16225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16226 \begin_inset Tabular
16227 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16228 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16229 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
16230 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16231 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16232 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16233 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16261 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16262 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16301 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16302 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16324 system key combination
16328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16329 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
16332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16341 and the em dash with
16344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16357 is the Mac label for the right
16368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16381 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16382 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16404 system key combination or
16405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16419 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16432 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16471 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16477 \begin_layout Standard
16478 Dashes can also be inserted with
16480 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16482 \begin_inset space ~
16485 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16493 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
16494 and 2014 for the en dash).
16497 \begin_layout Standard
16498 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
16499 mode and has a length of its own.
16500 Here are some examples:
16503 \begin_layout Enumerate
16504 line- and page-breaks
16505 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16515 \begin_layout Enumerate
16517 \begin_inset space ~
16521 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16531 \begin_layout Enumerate
16532 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
16533 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16543 \begin_layout Enumerate
16544 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16548 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16558 \begin_layout Standard
16560 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16562 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
16563 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
16571 \begin_layout Subsection
16572 Dashes and Line Breaks
16573 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16575 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16582 \begin_layout Standard
16583 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
16584 case and locale, e.
16585 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16591 \begin_layout Itemize
16592 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
16593 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
16596 \begin_layout Itemize
16597 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
16601 \begin_layout Itemize
16602 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
16603 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
16606 \begin_layout Standard
16607 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
16608 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16619 allows line breaks after hyphens, en-dashes and em-dashes.
16622 \begin_layout Enumerate
16623 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
16624 \begin_inset space ~
16627 – common in British English and generally recommended by
16629 The Elements of Typographic Style
16632 \begin_inset space ~
16635 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
16638 \begin_layout Enumerate
16639 Unwanted line breaks after dashes can be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
16643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16646 Prevent Hyphenation
16651 \begin_inset space ~
16667 in \SpecialChar TeX
16673 \begin_layout Itemize
16675 \begin_inset space ~
16679 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16689 height_special "totalheight"
16694 backgroundcolor "none"
16697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16706 \begin_layout Itemize
16710 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16720 height_special "totalheight"
16725 backgroundcolor "none"
16728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16732 \begin_inset space ~
16740 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
16741 \begin_inset space ~
16744 – sont très utiles.
16747 \begin_layout Itemize
16754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16763 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
16767 \begin_layout Standard
16768 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
16769 \begin_inset space ~
16772 – in contrast to an overfull line
16773 \begin_inset space ~
16776 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16780 \begin_layout Standard
16781 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
16784 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16785 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16786 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
16787 Disallow line breaks after dashes
16792 \begin_layout Enumerate
16793 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
16794 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
16795 or \SpecialChar TeX
16801 \begin_layout Itemize
16805 \begin_inset space ~
16808 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
16809 \begin_inset space ~
16812 – sont très utiles.
16816 \begin_layout Enumerate
16817 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
16818 \begin_inset Newline newline
16823 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16824 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16825 Optional line break
16831 \begin_layout Itemize
16832 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16833 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16834 should be followed by
16835 a line break opportunity.
16838 \begin_layout Standard
16839 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
16840 \begin_inset space ~
16844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16846 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
16857 \begin_layout Enumerate
16858 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16859 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
16860 or en dashes (see section
16861 \begin_inset space ~
16865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16867 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
16877 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16878 Changes and backwards compatibility
16881 \begin_layout Standard
16882 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
16884 \begin_inset space ~
16887 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
16888 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
16890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16897 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
16898 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
16906 \begin_layout Standard
16907 Since \SpecialChar LyX
16909 \begin_inset space ~
16912 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16914 prevents ligation to dashes.
16916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16923 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
16928 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
16929 after the input (unless the current text font is
16937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16938 The behavior was changed since
16939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16954 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
16955 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
16956 as non-breakable dashes.
16957 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
16966 \begin_layout Standard
16969 \begin_inset space ~
16977 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
16979 \begin_inset space ~
16982 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
16985 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16986 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16987 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
16988 Disallow line breaks after dashes
16990 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
16994 If you used both literal and
16995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17002 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
17004 \begin_inset space ~
17007 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
17008 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
17011 \begin_layout Subsection
17013 \begin_inset Index idx
17016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17023 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17025 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
17032 \begin_layout Standard
17033 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
17034 but automatically in the output.
17035 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17041 \begin_inset Index idx
17044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17051 following the rules of the document language.
17053 does not hyphenate text in the
17057 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
17060 \begin_layout Standard
17062 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
17066 font and with unusual constructs, like
17067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17075 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
17076 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
17077 This is done with the menu
17079 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17080 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17082 \begin_inset space ~
17088 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17090 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17094 \begin_layout Standard
17095 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
17096 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
17098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17107 would then see the hyphen
17108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17115 as a line break possibility.
17116 A line break at this point would look ugly.
17117 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
17120 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17121 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17124 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
17126 Prevent Hyphenation
17131 \begin_inset space ~
17139 \begin_layout Subsection
17141 \begin_inset Index idx
17144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17153 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17154 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
17155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17157 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
17164 \begin_layout Standard
17165 When \SpecialChar LyX
17166 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17167 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17169 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
17172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17175 appropriate amount of space.
17176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17179 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
17181 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
17182 gets after another word.
17185 \begin_layout Standard
17186 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
17187 not work in all cases.
17189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17200 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
17201 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
17204 \begin_layout Standard
17205 Here are some examples of
17209 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
17212 \begin_layout Itemize
17217 \begin_layout Itemize
17222 \begin_layout Standard
17223 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
17226 \begin_layout Itemize
17228 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17232 this is too much space!
17235 \begin_layout Itemize
17240 \begin_layout Standard
17241 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
17244 \begin_layout Standard
17245 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
17248 \begin_layout Enumerate
17252 \begin_inset space ~
17257 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
17258 \begin_inset space ~
17262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17264 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
17269 \begin_inset Index idx
17272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17273 Spaces ! inter-word
17281 \begin_layout Enumerate
17285 \begin_inset space ~
17290 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
17291 \begin_inset space ~
17295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17297 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
17302 \begin_inset Index idx
17305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17314 \begin_layout Enumerate
17318 \begin_inset space ~
17322 \begin_inset space ~
17326 \begin_inset space ~
17333 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17335 \begin_inset space ~
17340 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
17341 This function is also bound to
17344 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
17350 \begin_layout Standard
17351 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
17354 \begin_layout Itemize
17356 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17360 \begin_inset space \space{}
17363 this is too much space!
17366 \begin_layout Itemize
17367 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
17371 \begin_layout Standard
17372 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
17373 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
17375 will take care of this.
17378 \begin_layout Standard
17379 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
17383 \begin_inset space ~
17389 feature described in the section
17391 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
17396 Additional Features
17401 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17403 \begin_inset Index idx
17406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17407 Typography ! Quotation marks
17413 \begin_inset Index idx
17416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17417 Quotation marks | see
17421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17447 \begin_layout Standard
17449 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
17450 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
17451 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
17453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17461 The keyboard character,
17465 , generates this automatically.
17468 \begin_layout Standard
17469 You can specify what character the
17473 key produces by using the submenu
17479 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17483 \begin_inset Index idx
17486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17487 Document ! Settings
17492 dialog and switching the
17496 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17497 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
17499 \begin_inset space ~
17505 \begin_layout Labeling
17506 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17518 \begin_inset space ~
17522 \begin_inset space ~
17526 \begin_inset Quotes els
17530 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17544 \begin_inset Quotes els
17548 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17551 quotation marks (as common, e.
17552 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17558 \begin_layout Labeling
17559 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17562 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17566 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17570 \begin_inset space ~
17574 \begin_inset space ~
17578 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17582 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17588 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17592 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17596 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17600 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17603 quotation marks (as common, e.
17604 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17610 \begin_layout Labeling
17611 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17614 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17618 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17622 \begin_inset space ~
17626 \begin_inset space ~
17630 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17634 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17640 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17644 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17648 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17652 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17655 quotation marks (as common, e.
17656 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17662 \begin_layout Labeling
17663 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17666 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17670 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17674 \begin_inset space ~
17678 \begin_inset space ~
17682 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17686 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17692 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17696 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17700 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17704 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17707 quotation marks (as common, e.
17708 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17714 \begin_layout Labeling
17715 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17718 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17722 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17726 \begin_inset space ~
17730 \begin_inset space ~
17734 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17738 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17744 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17748 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17752 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17756 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17759 quotation marks (as common, e.
17760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17763 g., in Switzerland)
17766 \begin_layout Labeling
17767 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17770 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17774 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17778 \begin_inset space ~
17782 \begin_inset space ~
17786 \begin_inset Quotes als
17790 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17796 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17800 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17804 \begin_inset Quotes als
17808 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17811 quotation marks (as common, e.
17812 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17818 \begin_layout Labeling
17819 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17822 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17826 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17830 \begin_inset space ~
17834 \begin_inset space ~
17838 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17842 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17848 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17852 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17856 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17860 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17863 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17866 \begin_layout Labeling
17867 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17870 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17874 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17878 \begin_inset space ~
17882 \begin_inset space ~
17886 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17890 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17896 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17900 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17904 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17908 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17911 quotation marks (as common, e.
17912 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17915 g., in Great Britain)
17918 \begin_layout Labeling
17919 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17922 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17926 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17930 \begin_inset space ~
17934 \begin_inset space ~
17938 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17942 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17948 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17952 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17956 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17960 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17963 quotation marks (as common, e.
17964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17970 \begin_layout Labeling
17971 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17974 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17978 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17982 \begin_inset space ~
17986 \begin_inset space ~
17990 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17994 \begin_inset Quotes irs
18000 \begin_inset Quotes ild
18004 \begin_inset Quotes ird
18008 \begin_inset Quotes ils
18012 \begin_inset Quotes irs
18015 quotation marks (another style common in France)
18019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18020 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
18021 since these look identical to the inner marks.
18022 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
18023 the inner marks differ).
18031 \begin_layout Labeling
18032 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18035 \begin_inset Quotes rld
18039 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18043 \begin_inset space ~
18047 \begin_inset space ~
18051 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18055 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18061 \begin_inset Quotes rld
18065 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18069 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18073 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18076 quotation marks (as common, e.
18077 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18083 \begin_layout Labeling
18084 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18087 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18091 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18095 \begin_inset space ~
18099 \begin_inset space ~
18103 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18107 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18113 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18117 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18121 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18125 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18128 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
18131 \begin_layout Labeling
18132 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18133 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18141 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18147 \begin_inset space ~
18151 \begin_inset space ~
18157 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18165 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18169 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18173 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18177 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18181 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18184 quotation marks (as common, e.
18185 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18193 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18194 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18202 \begin_layout Labeling
18203 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18204 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18212 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18218 \begin_inset space ~
18222 \begin_inset space ~
18228 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18236 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18240 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18244 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18248 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18252 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18255 quotation marks (as common, e.
18256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18259 g., in North Korea and China)
18263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18264 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18265 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18273 \begin_layout Standard
18274 Inner quotation marks
18278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18279 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18280 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18281 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18289 does not necessarily mean
18290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18298 This is why we call them
18299 \begin_inset Quotes els
18303 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18319 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18321 \begin_inset Quotes els
18325 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18328 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
18331 arg "quote-insert inner"
18336 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18342 \begin_layout Standard
18343 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18344 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18345 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18346 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18347 If you check the setting
18349 Use dynamic quotation marks
18353 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18354 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18357 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18358 they appear in a special color).
18359 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18360 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18365 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18368 \begin_layout Standard
18369 Individual quotation marks (i.
18370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18373 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18374 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18378 \begin_layout Subsection
18380 \begin_inset Index idx
18383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18384 Typography ! Ligatures
18390 \begin_inset Index idx
18393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18424 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18431 \begin_layout Standard
18432 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18433 print them as single characters.
18434 These groups are known as
18439 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18440 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18442 Here are the standard ligatures:
18445 \begin_layout Itemize
18449 \begin_layout Itemize
18453 \begin_layout Itemize
18457 \begin_layout Itemize
18461 \begin_layout Itemize
18465 \begin_layout Standard
18466 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18469 \begin_layout Standard
18470 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18471 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18479 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18495 To break a ligature, use
18497 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18498 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18500 \begin_inset space ~
18507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18518 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18535 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18543 \begin_layout Subsection
18545 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18547 \begin_inset Index idx
18550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18560 \begin_layout Standard
18563 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18564 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18568 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18571 \begin_layout Description
18573 The name of the game.
18576 \begin_layout Description
18578 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18582 \begin_layout Description
18584 The \SpecialChar TeX
18585 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18589 \begin_layout Description
18590 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18591 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18595 \begin_layout Standard
18596 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18602 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18610 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18611 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18612 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18613 converges to the number
18614 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18617 : The actual version is
18618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18626 , the previous one was
18627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18638 \begin_layout Subsection
18640 \begin_inset Index idx
18643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18652 \begin_layout Standard
18653 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18654 space between two words.
18655 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18665 for units use the menu
18667 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18668 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18670 \begin_inset space ~
18678 arg "space-insert thin"
18684 \begin_layout Standard
18685 Here is an example to show the differences:
18688 \begin_layout Standard
18689 \begin_inset Tabular
18690 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18691 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18692 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18693 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18700 \begin_inset space ~
18704 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18716 space between number and unit
18723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18728 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18732 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18744 half space between number and unit
18757 \begin_layout Subsection
18759 \begin_inset Index idx
18762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18763 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18771 \begin_layout Standard
18772 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18774 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18775 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18776 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18777 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18778 These bits of text became known as
18789 \begin_layout Standard
18790 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18791 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18792 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18793 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18794 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18795 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18796 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18797 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18798 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18799 \begin_inset Newline newline
18807 \begin_inset Newline newline
18815 \begin_inset Newline newline
18818 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18819 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18820 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18822 \begin_inset space ~
18826 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18828 key "latexcompanion"
18834 \begin_inset space ~
18838 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18845 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18846 's page break mechanism.
18849 \begin_layout Chapter
18850 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18851 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18853 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18860 \begin_layout Standard
18861 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18864 \begin_inset space ~
18870 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18873 \begin_layout Section
18875 \begin_inset Index idx
18878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18885 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18894 \begin_layout Standard
18896 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18899 \begin_layout Description
18902 \begin_inset space ~
18905 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18906 \begin_inset Newline newline
18910 \begin_inset Note Note
18913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18914 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18922 \begin_layout Description
18923 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18924 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18925 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18928 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18929 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18931 \begin_inset space ~
18937 \begin_inset Newline newline
18941 \begin_inset Note Comment
18944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18945 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18954 \begin_layout Description
18956 \begin_inset space ~
18959 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18960 set in the document settings under
18962 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18964 \begin_inset space ~
18970 \begin_inset Newline newline
18974 \begin_inset Newline newline
18978 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18987 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18988 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18993 of a comment that appears in the output.
18999 \begin_inset Newline newline
19003 \begin_inset Newline newline
19006 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
19009 \begin_layout Standard
19010 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
19018 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19022 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
19025 \begin_layout Section
19027 \begin_inset Index idx
19030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19037 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19039 name "sec:Footnotes"
19046 \begin_layout Standard
19048 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
19051 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19054 or the toolbar button
19057 arg "footnote-insert"
19069 \begin_inset Graphics
19070 filename clipart/footnote.png
19079 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19080 's representation of your footnote.
19090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19109 label, the box will
19113 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
19114 Clicking on the box label again will close
19127 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
19128 and click on the footnote
19143 \begin_layout Standard
19144 Here is an example footnote:
19152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19153 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19161 \begin_layout Standard
19162 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19163 position where the footnote box is placed.
19164 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19165 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19166 according to the document class.
19168 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19169 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19175 ey are described in the
19178 \begin_inset space ~
19186 \begin_layout Section
19188 \begin_inset Index idx
19191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19198 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19200 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19207 \begin_layout Standard
19208 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19210 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19212 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19214 \begin_inset space ~
19219 or the toolbar button
19222 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19248 appearing within your text.
19249 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19250 's representation of your margin
19259 \begin_layout Standard
19260 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19264 \begin_inset Marginal
19267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19269 This is a marginal note.
19277 \begin_layout Standard
19278 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19279 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19280 pages, right on odd pages.
19283 \begin_layout Standard
19284 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19287 \begin_inset space ~
19295 \begin_inset space ~
19303 \begin_layout Section
19304 Graphics and Images
19305 \begin_inset Index idx
19308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19315 \begin_inset Index idx
19318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19325 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19327 name "sec:Graphics"
19334 \begin_layout Standard
19335 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19336 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19339 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19344 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19348 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19351 \begin_layout Standard
19352 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19357 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19358 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19360 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19361 \begin_inset space ~
19365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19367 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19374 \begin_layout Standard
19379 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19380 of the image in the output.
19381 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19385 \begin_inset space ~
19389 \begin_inset space ~
19398 \begin_inset space ~
19402 \begin_inset space ~
19406 \begin_inset space ~
19411 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19412 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19420 \begin_layout Standard
19424 \begin_inset space ~
19428 \begin_inset space ~
19433 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19434 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19436 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19441 \begin_inset space ~
19446 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19447 with the image size is printed.
19450 \begin_layout Standard
19451 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19452 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19454 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19457 \begin_layout Standard
19459 \begin_inset Graphics
19460 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
19468 \begin_layout Standard
19469 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19470 the image into a float, see section
19471 \begin_inset space ~
19475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19477 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19484 \begin_layout Subsection
19486 \begin_inset Index idx
19489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19496 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19498 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19505 \begin_layout Standard
19506 You can insert images in any known file format.
19507 But as we explained in section
19508 \begin_inset space ~
19512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19514 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19518 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19520 therefore uses the program
19524 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19525 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19526 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19527 \begin_inset space ~
19531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19533 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19540 \begin_layout Standard
19541 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19544 \begin_layout Description
19546 \begin_inset space ~
19549 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19550 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19551 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19555 Graphics Interchange Format
19556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19559 (GIF, file extension
19560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19572 \begin_inset Index idx
19575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19607 Portable Network Graphics
19608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19611 (PNG, file extension
19612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19624 \begin_inset Index idx
19627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19659 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19663 (JPG, file extension
19664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19688 \begin_inset Index idx
19691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19722 \begin_layout Description
19724 \begin_inset space ~
19727 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19729 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19730 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19731 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19732 \begin_inset Newline newline
19735 Scalable image formats can be
19736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19739 Scalable Vector Graphics
19740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19743 (SVG, file extension
19744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19756 \begin_inset Index idx
19759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19791 Encapsulated PostScript
19792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19795 (EPS, file extension
19796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19808 \begin_inset Index idx
19811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19843 Portable Document Format
19844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19847 (PDF, file extension
19848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19860 \begin_inset Index idx
19863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19878 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19879 result will not be scalable.
19880 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19886 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19894 \begin_layout Standard
19895 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19902 \begin_layout Subsection
19903 Grouping of Image Settings
19904 \begin_inset Index idx
19907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19908 Images ! Settings grouping
19916 \begin_layout Standard
19917 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19919 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19920 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19922 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19923 need to manually change each of them.
19927 \begin_layout Standard
19928 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19931 \begin_inset space ~
19935 \begin_inset space ~
19947 \begin_inset space ~
19951 \begin_inset space ~
19957 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19958 and checking the name of the desired group.
19961 \begin_layout Section
19963 \begin_inset Index idx
19966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19973 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19982 \begin_layout Standard
19983 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19986 arg "tabular-insert"
19991 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19995 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19996 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19997 from the rest of the table.
19998 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19999 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
20001 Here is an example table:
20004 \begin_layout Standard
20006 \begin_inset Tabular
20007 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
20008 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20009 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20010 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20011 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20012 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20212 \begin_layout Subsection
20216 \begin_layout Standard
20217 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20220 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20224 This brings up the table dialog.
20225 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20226 cursor is placed currently.
20227 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20228 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20229 done on all of your selection.
20232 \begin_layout Standard
20233 In addition to the table dialog, the
20236 \begin_inset space ~
20241 helps you in setting table properties.
20242 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20245 \begin_layout Standard
20249 \begin_inset space ~
20254 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20255 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20256 current cell respectively.
20257 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20259 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20260 of text, see section
20261 \begin_inset space ~
20265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20267 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20274 \begin_layout Standard
20275 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20276 using the check box
20285 This will merge the cells to
20289 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20290 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20291 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20292 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20293 in the last row without the upper border:
20296 \begin_layout Standard
20298 \begin_inset Tabular
20299 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20300 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20301 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20302 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20303 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20304 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20315 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20324 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20400 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20435 \begin_layout Standard
20436 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20437 -arguments for the table.
20438 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20439 explained in the chapter
20446 \begin_inset space ~
20452 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20453 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20454 but are visible in the output.
20457 \begin_layout Standard
20458 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20466 Most DVI-viewers are
20470 able to display rotations.
20478 \begin_layout Standard
20483 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20488 adds lines for all cell borders.
20491 \begin_layout Subsection
20493 \begin_inset Index idx
20496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20497 Tables ! Multi-page
20503 \begin_inset Index idx
20506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20515 \begin_layout Standard
20516 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20519 \begin_inset space ~
20523 \begin_inset space ~
20531 \begin_inset space ~
20536 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20537 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20540 \begin_layout Description
20545 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20546 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20547 Except for the first page, if
20550 \begin_inset space ~
20558 \begin_layout Description
20562 \begin_inset space ~
20567 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20568 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20571 \begin_layout Description
20576 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20577 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20578 except for the last page, if
20581 \begin_inset space ~
20589 \begin_layout Description
20593 \begin_inset space ~
20598 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20599 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20602 \begin_layout Description
20603 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20604 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20606 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20610 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20613 \begin_inset space ~
20621 \begin_layout Standard
20622 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20623 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20624 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20630 In this context, first means first in this order:
20633 \begin_inset space ~
20645 \begin_inset space ~
20650 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20653 \begin_layout Standard
20655 \begin_inset Tabular
20656 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20657 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20658 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20659 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20660 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20661 <row endfirsthead="true">
20662 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20668 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20673 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20682 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20692 <row endfirsthead="true">
20693 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20704 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20713 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20725 <row endhead="true">
20726 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20737 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20746 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20756 <row endhead="true">
20757 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20768 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20777 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20789 <row endfoot="true">
20790 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20801 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20810 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20841 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21782 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21791 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21800 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21811 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21842 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21873 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21904 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21935 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21966 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21997 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22028 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22059 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22090 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22121 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22152 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22183 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22214 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22245 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22276 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22307 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22338 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22369 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22400 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22431 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22462 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22493 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22524 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22555 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22586 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22617 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22648 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22679 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22710 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22741 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22771 <row endlastfoot="true">
22772 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22783 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22792 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22809 \begin_layout Subsection
22811 \begin_inset Index idx
22814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22823 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22830 \begin_layout Standard
22831 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22832 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22833 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22834 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22838 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22841 \begin_layout Standard
22842 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22843 for the column in the table dialog.
22844 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22845 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22849 \begin_layout Standard
22851 \begin_inset Tabular
22852 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22853 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22854 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22855 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22856 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22876 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22945 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23001 This is longer now.
23006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23057 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
23058 This is longer now.
23063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23089 \begin_layout Standard
23090 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
23091 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
23095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23096 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
23097 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
23103 Selection with the mouse or with
23107 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
23108 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
23109 the selection from outside the table.
23112 \begin_layout Section
23114 \begin_inset Index idx
23117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23133 \begin_layout Subsection
23137 \begin_layout Standard
23138 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
23139 have a fixed location.
23141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23148 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
23156 \begin_inset space ~
23161 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
23162 too many notes on the current page.
23165 \begin_layout Standard
23166 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23167 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23168 and pages without text.
23169 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23170 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23171 Floats are therefore numbered.
23172 Referencing is described in section
23173 \begin_inset space ~
23177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23179 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23186 \begin_layout Standard
23187 To insert a float, use the menu
23189 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23193 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23194 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23196 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23197 \begin_inset Index idx
23200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23206 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23207 paragraph within the float.
23208 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23209 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23210 left-clicking on the box label.
23211 A closed float box looks like this:
23212 \begin_inset Graphics
23213 filename clipart/float.png
23218 – a gray button with a red label.
23221 \begin_layout Standard
23222 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23224 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23227 \begin_layout Subsection
23229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23231 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23236 \begin_inset Index idx
23239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23240 Floats ! Figure floats
23248 \begin_layout Standard
23250 \begin_inset space ~
23254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23256 reference "fig:A-star-in"
23260 was created using the menu
23262 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23263 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23269 arg "float-insert figure"
23273 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23276 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23282 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23286 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23287 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23289 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23291 \begin_inset space ~
23299 arg "layout-paragraph"
23305 \begin_layout Standard
23306 \begin_inset Float figure
23311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23313 \begin_inset Graphics
23314 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23324 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23327 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23329 name "fig:A-star-in"
23346 \begin_layout Standard
23347 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23348 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23350 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23359 ) and refer to it using the menu
23361 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23367 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23371 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23372 vague references like
23373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23380 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23381 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23391 For more about cross-references, see section
23392 \begin_inset space ~
23396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23398 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23405 \begin_layout Standard
23406 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23407 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23408 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23409 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23410 as described in section
23411 \begin_inset space ~
23415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23417 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23423 \begin_inset space ~
23427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23429 reference "fig:Two-images"
23433 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23434 You can also set the images one below the other.
23436 \begin_inset space ~
23440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23442 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23449 reference "fig:Star"
23453 are the subfigures.
23456 \begin_layout Standard
23457 \begin_inset Float figure
23462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23463 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23467 \begin_inset Float figure
23472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23473 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23478 name "fig:Undefinable"
23490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23491 \begin_inset Graphics
23492 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
23504 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23508 \begin_inset Float figure
23513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23514 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23517 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23532 \begin_inset Graphics
23533 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23545 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23552 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23555 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23557 name "fig:Two-images"
23574 \begin_layout Subsection
23576 \begin_inset Index idx
23579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23580 Floats ! Table floats
23588 \begin_layout Standard
23589 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23591 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23592 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23595 or the toolbar button
23598 arg "float-insert table"
23602 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23603 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23604 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23606 \begin_inset space ~
23610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23612 reference "tab:Table-float"
23619 \begin_layout Standard
23620 \begin_inset Float table
23625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23626 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23629 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23631 name "tab:Table-float"
23643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23645 \begin_inset Tabular
23646 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23647 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23648 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23649 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23650 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23777 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23798 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23801 \end{array}\right]$
23809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23822 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23843 \begin_layout Subsection
23845 \begin_inset Index idx
23848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23857 \begin_layout Standard
23859 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23860 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23861 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23863 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23871 \begin_inset space ~
23879 \begin_layout Section
23881 \begin_inset Index idx
23884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23893 \begin_layout Standard
23895 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23897 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23898 \begin_inset space \space{}
23905 \begin_layout Standard
23906 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23907 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23909 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23913 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23914 and its alignment within the page.
23917 \begin_layout Standard
23919 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23929 height_special "totalheight"
23934 backgroundcolor "none"
23937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23940 This is a minipage.
23941 The text is set in an italic style.
23944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23947 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23948 another formatting.
23956 \begin_layout Standard
23957 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23960 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23964 as described in section
23965 \begin_inset space ~
23969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23971 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23976 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23982 \begin_layout Standard
23983 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23993 height_special "totalheight"
23998 backgroundcolor "none"
24001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24002 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
24003 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
24009 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24013 \begin_inset Box Frameless
24023 height_special "totalheight"
24028 backgroundcolor "none"
24031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24032 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
24033 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
24041 \begin_layout Standard
24042 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24048 \begin_layout Standard
24049 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
24051 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
24058 \begin_inset space ~
24066 \begin_layout Chapter
24067 Mathematical Formulas
24068 \begin_inset Index idx
24071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24078 \begin_inset Index idx
24081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24112 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
24119 \begin_layout Standard
24120 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
24125 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24128 \begin_layout Section
24130 \begin_inset Index idx
24133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24142 \begin_layout Standard
24143 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
24156 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
24158 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
24159 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
24160 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
24162 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24168 \begin_layout Standard
24169 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24173 \begin_inset space ~
24178 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24181 \begin_layout Standard
24182 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24183 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24186 \begin_layout Standard
24187 This is a line with an inline formula
24188 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24194 \begin_layout Standard
24195 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24196 paragraph, like this one:
24197 \begin_inset Formula
24204 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24207 \begin_layout Standard
24209 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24211 For example, typing
24212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24225 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24226 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24230 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24233 \begin_inset space ~
24241 \begin_layout Subsection
24242 Navigating in Formulas
24243 \begin_inset Index idx
24246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24255 \begin_layout Standard
24256 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24257 achieved with the arrow keys.
24259 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24260 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24265 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24266 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24270 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24274 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24277 \end{array}\right]$
24285 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24290 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24291 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24294 \begin_layout Standard
24299 , printed in this document as
24300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24304 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24311 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24312 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24313 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24318 For example, if you want
24319 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24327 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24337 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24341 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24346 , since in the latter case only the
24349 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24354 will be under the square root sign:
24355 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24361 \begin_layout Standard
24362 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24364 \begin_inset Formula
24366 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24375 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24376 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24379 \begin_layout Subsection
24383 \begin_layout Standard
24384 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24385 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24389 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24390 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24391 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24392 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24393 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24397 \begin_layout Subsection
24398 Exponents and Subscripts
24399 \begin_inset Index idx
24402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24409 \begin_inset Index idx
24412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24421 \begin_layout Standard
24422 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24425 arg "math-superscript"
24431 arg "math-subscript"
24434 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24436 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24439 , type in a formula
24442 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24452 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24458 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24462 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24468 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24474 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24483 , you have to use an extra
24487 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24488 For example, if you want
24489 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24495 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24501 Subscripts are similar: To get
24502 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24508 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24516 \begin_layout Subsection
24518 \begin_inset Index idx
24521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24530 \begin_layout Standard
24531 Create a fraction either with the command
24537 or by using the icon
24540 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24546 \begin_inset space ~
24552 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24553 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24554 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24559 To move back up, press
24564 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24565 \begin_inset Formula
24567 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24570 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24578 \begin_layout Subsection
24580 \begin_inset Index idx
24583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24592 \begin_layout Standard
24593 Roots can be created using the
24596 \begin_inset space ~
24604 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24610 arg "math-insert \\root"
24632 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24638 always produces a square root.
24641 \begin_layout Subsection
24642 Operators with Limits
24643 \begin_inset Index idx
24646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24653 \begin_inset Index idx
24656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24663 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24665 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24672 \begin_layout Standard
24674 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24678 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24681 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24682 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24683 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24684 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24685 The sum operator will automatically place its
24686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24693 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24695 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24699 \begin_inset Formula
24701 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24706 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24710 \begin_layout Standard
24711 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24713 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24714 behind the operator and using the menu
24716 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24717 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24719 \begin_inset space ~
24723 \begin_inset space ~
24737 \begin_layout Standard
24738 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24747 \begin_inset Index idx
24750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24757 \begin_inset Formula
24759 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24764 which will place the
24765 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24777 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24778 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24784 \begin_layout Standard
24785 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24792 Have a look at section
24793 \begin_inset space ~
24797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24799 reference "subsec:Functions"
24803 for an explanation of function macros.
24806 \begin_layout Subsection
24808 \begin_inset Index idx
24811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24820 \begin_layout Standard
24821 Most math symbols can be found in the
24824 \begin_inset space ~
24829 under one of several categories; including
24846 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24850 \begin_layout Standard
24851 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24852 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24853 don't have to use the
24856 \begin_inset space ~
24861 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24863 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24866 \begin_layout Subsection
24868 \begin_inset Index idx
24871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24880 \begin_layout Standard
24881 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24887 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24893 \begin_inset space ~
24901 arg "math-insert \\space"
24905 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24906 For example, the sequence
24911 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24914 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24916 \begin_inset Graphics
24917 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24922 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24923 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24924 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24925 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24926 , because they are negative
24928 Here are two examples:
24931 \begin_layout Standard
24941 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24947 \begin_layout Standard
24957 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24963 \begin_layout Subsection
24965 \begin_inset Index idx
24968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24975 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24977 name "subsec:Functions"
24984 \begin_layout Standard
24988 \begin_inset space ~
24993 contains under the button
24996 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24999 a number of function macros, such as
25000 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
25004 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
25012 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
25019 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
25020 avoid confusions, because
25021 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
25025 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
25031 \begin_layout Standard
25032 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
25034 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
25038 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
25044 \begin_layout Standard
25045 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
25046 are placed, as described in section
25047 \begin_inset space ~
25051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25053 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
25060 \begin_layout Subsection
25062 \begin_inset Index idx
25065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25074 \begin_layout Standard
25075 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
25077 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
25078 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
25079 commands, for example, to enter
25080 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25083 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
25084 Our example is entered by typing
25089 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25096 \begin_inset space ~
25100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25102 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
25106 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
25109 \begin_layout Standard
25110 \begin_inset Float table
25115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25116 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25121 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
25125 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
25133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25135 \begin_inset Tabular
25136 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
25137 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25138 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25139 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25140 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25224 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25278 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25332 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25386 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25440 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25494 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25548 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25602 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25656 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25701 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25722 \begin_layout Standard
25723 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25726 \begin_inset space ~
25734 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25737 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25741 \begin_layout Section
25742 Brackets and Delimiters
25743 \begin_inset Index idx
25746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25753 \begin_inset Index idx
25756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25763 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25765 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25772 \begin_layout Standard
25773 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25775 For some purposes, using just the keys
25780 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25781 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25782 toolbar delimiter icon
25785 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25789 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25790 \begin_inset Formula
25792 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25800 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25801 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25805 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25808 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25814 \begin_inset Formula
25816 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25824 \begin_layout Standard
25825 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25826 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25830 \begin_layout Standard
25831 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25832 left side and right side.
25833 If you use the option
25836 \begin_inset space ~
25841 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25842 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25844 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25849 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25850 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25853 \begin_layout Standard
25854 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25855 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25856 is to go inside the brackets.
25857 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25862 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25863 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25864 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25868 arg "math-delim ( )"
25874 \begin_layout Section
25875 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25876 \begin_inset Index idx
25879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25886 \begin_inset Index idx
25889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25896 \begin_inset Index idx
25899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25900 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25908 \begin_layout Standard
25909 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25913 \begin_inset space ~
25921 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25925 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25926 Here is an example:
25927 \begin_inset Formula
25929 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25938 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25939 \begin_inset space ~
25943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25945 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25950 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25951 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25952 This alignment is set in the box
25957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26006 for every column as default.
26007 For example, the sequence
26008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26019 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
26020 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
26021 corresponds to the relevant column.
26022 The result will look like this:
26023 \begin_inset Formula
26026 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
26027 column & has & has\,right\\
26028 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
26037 \begin_layout Standard
26038 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
26041 arg "newline-insert newline"
26044 while the cursor is in the matrix.
26045 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
26047 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26050 or the math toolbar.
26053 \begin_layout Standard
26054 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
26055 It can be created with the menu
26057 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26058 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26060 \begin_inset space ~
26072 Here is an example:
26073 \begin_inset Formula
26087 \begin_layout Standard
26088 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26091 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
26094 arg "newline-insert newline"
26098 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
26103 arg "newline-insert newline"
26106 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
26107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26114 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
26115 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
26116 A new row is created by every further entry of
26119 arg "newline-insert newline"
26123 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
26124 Here is an example:
26125 \begin_inset Formula
26127 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
26128 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
26133 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
26134 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
26135 \begin_inset Formula
26137 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
26145 \begin_layout Standard
26146 The multi-line formula type described here is called
26153 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
26154 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
26155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26157 reference "eq:asquared"
26162 The other types are described in section
26163 \begin_inset space ~
26167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26169 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26176 \begin_layout Section
26177 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26178 \begin_inset Index idx
26181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26182 Math ! Formula numbering
26188 \begin_inset Index idx
26191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26192 Math ! Referencing formulas
26198 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26200 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26207 \begin_layout Standard
26208 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26210 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26211 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26213 \begin_inset space ~
26217 \begin_inset space ~
26225 arg "math-number-toggle"
26229 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26230 within parentheses.
26231 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26232 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26233 the document class.
26234 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26235 separated by a dot:
26236 \begin_inset Formula
26246 arg "math-number-toggle"
26249 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26250 You can only number displayed formulas.
26253 \begin_layout Standard
26254 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26256 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26257 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26259 \begin_inset space ~
26263 \begin_inset space ~
26271 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26274 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26275 \begin_inset Formula
26278 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26284 To number all lines use the shortcut
26287 arg "math-number-toggle"
26293 \begin_layout Standard
26294 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26297 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26298 A label is inserted with the menu
26300 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26309 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26310 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26311 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26323 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26324 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26325 We inserted in the following example the label
26326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26333 in the second line:
26334 \begin_inset Formula
26336 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26337 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26342 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26343 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26344 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26346 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26348 \begin_inset space ~
26356 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26360 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26361 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26362 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26363 as the formula number:
26366 \begin_layout Standard
26367 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26370 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26377 \begin_layout Standard
26378 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26379 's cross-reference box are described in section
26380 \begin_inset space ~
26384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26386 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26391 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26399 \begin_layout Section
26400 User defined math macros
26401 \begin_inset Index idx
26404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26413 \begin_layout Standard
26415 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26416 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26417 Math macros are explained in section
26420 \begin_inset space ~
26432 \begin_layout Section
26436 \begin_layout Subsection
26438 \begin_inset Index idx
26441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26450 \begin_layout Standard
26451 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26452 To set a font in a formula, use the
26455 \begin_inset space ~
26463 arg "math-insert \\font"
26466 , or enter its command, listed in table
26467 \begin_inset space ~
26471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26473 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26480 \begin_layout Standard
26481 \begin_inset Float table
26486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26487 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26492 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26496 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26506 \begin_inset Tabular
26507 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26508 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26509 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26510 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26542 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26569 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26596 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26629 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26656 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26683 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26717 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26744 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26778 \begin_layout Standard
26779 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26787 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26803 \begin_layout Standard
26804 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26805 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26810 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26811 space when you need a space in the box.
26812 Here is an example where
26813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26824 denotes the set of numbers:
26825 \begin_inset Formula
26827 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26835 \begin_layout Standard
26836 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26837 You can, for example, put a character in
26846 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26850 \begin_inset Newline newline
26853 So it is better not to use this feature.
26856 \begin_layout Standard
26857 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26858 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26862 \begin_inset Newline newline
26865 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26871 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26872 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26878 \begin_layout Standard
26885 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26888 \begin_layout Standard
26889 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26891 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26892 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26894 \begin_inset space ~
26902 \begin_layout Subsection
26904 \begin_inset Index idx
26907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26916 \begin_layout Standard
26917 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26919 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26923 \begin_inset space ~
26927 \begin_inset space ~
26935 \begin_inset space ~
26943 arg "math-insert \\font"
26947 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26948 in black instead of blue.
26949 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26950 Here is an example:
26951 \begin_inset Formula
26954 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26955 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26964 \begin_layout Subsection
26966 \begin_inset Index idx
26969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26978 \begin_layout Standard
26979 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26980 automatically chosen in most situations.
26998 For most characters,
27006 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
27007 and certain other structures, are set larger in
27012 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
27013 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
27014 thinks are appropriate.
27015 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
27018 arg "math-insert \\style"
27022 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
27023 For example, you can set
27024 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
27027 , which is normally in
27036 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
27040 The four styles are used in the following example:
27043 \begin_layout Standard
27044 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
27048 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
27052 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
27056 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
27062 \begin_layout Standard
27063 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
27064 is set in a particular size with the menu
27066 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27068 \begin_inset space ~
27073 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
27074 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
27075 will be adjusted to correspond.
27076 As an example here is a formula in the font size
27077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27087 \begin_layout Standard
27091 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
27097 \begin_layout Section
27098 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27100 \begin_inset Index idx
27103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27110 \begin_inset Index idx
27113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27122 \begin_layout Standard
27124 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
27125 that are in common use.
27128 \begin_layout Subsection
27129 Enabling AMS-Support
27132 \begin_layout Standard
27133 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
27134 the document by selecting the checkbox
27137 \begin_inset space ~
27141 \begin_inset space ~
27145 \begin_inset space ~
27152 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27156 \begin_inset Index idx
27159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27160 Document ! Settings
27168 \begin_inset space ~
27174 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27175 -errors in formulas,
27176 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27179 \begin_layout Subsection
27181 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27183 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27188 \begin_inset Index idx
27191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27192 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27200 \begin_layout Standard
27201 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27202 provides a selection of different formula types.
27204 allows you to choose between
27225 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27226 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27233 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27236 \begin_layout Chapter
27240 \begin_layout Section
27242 \begin_inset Index idx
27245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27254 name "sec:Cross-References"
27261 \begin_layout Standard
27262 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27263 's strengths is cross-references.
27264 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27266 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27267 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27268 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27271 \begin_layout Enumerate
27275 \begin_layout Enumerate
27276 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27278 name "enu:Second-item"
27285 \begin_layout Enumerate
27289 \begin_layout Standard
27290 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27292 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27295 or by pressing the toolbar button
27302 A gray label box like this:
27303 \begin_inset Graphics
27304 filename clipart/label.png
27308 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27310 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27345 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27346 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27362 \begin_layout Standard
27363 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27365 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27368 or the toolbar button
27371 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27375 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27376 \begin_inset Graphics
27377 filename clipart/reference.png
27381 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27383 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27396 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27400 \begin_layout Standard
27401 As an alternative to
27403 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27406 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27411 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27412 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27414 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27426 \begin_layout Standard
27427 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27428 \begin_inset space ~
27432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27434 reference "enu:Second-item"
27441 \begin_layout Standard
27442 It is recommended to use a protected space
27446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27447 described in section
27448 \begin_inset space ~
27452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27454 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27463 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27464 line breaks between them.
27467 \begin_layout Standard
27468 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27471 \begin_layout Description
27472 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27475 reference "fig:Two-images"
27482 \begin_layout Description
27483 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27484 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27496 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27503 \begin_layout Description
27504 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27505 \begin_inset space ~
27509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27510 LatexCommand pageref
27511 reference "fig:Two-images"
27518 \begin_layout Description
27520 \begin_inset space ~
27524 \begin_inset space ~
27527 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27529 LatexCommand vpageref
27530 reference "fig:Two-images"
27535 \begin_inset Newline newline
27538 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27539 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27540 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27541 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27542 it prints “on the next page”.
27543 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27546 \begin_layout Description
27548 \begin_inset space ~
27552 \begin_inset space ~
27556 \begin_inset space ~
27559 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27562 reference "fig:Two-images"
27567 \begin_inset Newline newline
27570 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27576 ; otherwise it behaves like
27580 \begin_inset space ~
27584 \begin_inset space ~
27593 \begin_layout Description
27595 \begin_inset space ~
27598 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27599 \begin_inset Newline newline
27603 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27611 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27621 \begin_inset Index idx
27624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27626 packages ! prettyref
27632 \begin_inset Index idx
27635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27637 packages ! refstyle
27648 \begin_inset Newline newline
27651 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27652 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27655 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27659 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27660 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27668 is the default and preferred because
27672 supports only English documents.
27673 The format is specified by using the command
27685 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27686 preamble of the document.
27687 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27705 \begin_inset Newline newline
27712 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27717 \begin_inset Newline newline
27728 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27729 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27731 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27732 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27737 , you might do so as follows:
27738 \begin_inset Newline newline
27745 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27750 \begin_inset Newline newline
27753 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
27754 the package documentation
27755 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27757 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27763 \begin_inset Newline newline
27774 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
27781 \begin_layout Description
27783 \begin_inset space ~
27786 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27788 LatexCommand nameref
27789 reference "fig:Two-images"
27796 \begin_layout Description
27798 \begin_inset space ~
27801 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27802 label for the reference:
27803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27804 LatexCommand labelonly
27805 reference "fig:Two-images"
27810 \begin_inset Newline newline
27813 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
27814 Code, if you want to issue a command
27815 that \SpecialChar LyX
27821 , then you may want to use the
27824 \begin_inset space ~
27829 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27839 This is the form needed for e.
27840 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27844 \begin_inset space \space{}
27851 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
27852 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27854 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27858 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27862 \begin_layout Standard
27863 You can only use the style
27867 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27871 is always possible.
27874 \begin_layout Standard
27875 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27876 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27878 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27879 \begin_inset space ~
27883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27885 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27892 \begin_layout Standard
27893 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27897 \begin_inset space ~
27901 \begin_inset space ~
27906 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27907 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27910 \begin_inset space ~
27915 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27916 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27919 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27925 \begin_layout Standard
27926 You can change labels at any time.
27927 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27928 do not need to think about this.
27931 \begin_layout Standard
27932 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27934 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27938 \begin_layout Standard
27939 References are described in detail in the section
27940 \begin_inset space ~
27950 \begin_inset space ~
27958 \begin_layout Section
27959 Table of Contents and other Listings
27960 \begin_inset Index idx
27963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27970 \begin_inset Index idx
27973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27974 Navigating ! Outline
27980 \begin_inset Index idx
27983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27990 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27999 \begin_layout Subsection
28001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28003 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
28010 \begin_layout Standard
28011 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
28013 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28014 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28016 \begin_inset space ~
28020 \begin_inset space ~
28026 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
28028 If you click on it, the
28032 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
28033 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
28034 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
28036 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
28038 \begin_inset space ~
28043 that is described in section
28044 \begin_inset space ~
28048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28050 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
28057 \begin_layout Standard
28058 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
28059 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
28061 \begin_inset space ~
28065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28067 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
28071 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
28073 \begin_inset space ~
28077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28079 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
28083 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
28085 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
28088 \begin_layout Subsection
28089 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
28090 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28092 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28099 \begin_layout Standard
28100 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
28102 You can insert them via the
28104 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28108 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
28111 \begin_layout Section
28112 URLs and Hyperlinks
28113 \begin_inset Index idx
28116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28123 \begin_inset Index idx
28126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28135 \begin_layout Subsection
28137 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28146 \begin_layout Standard
28147 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28149 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28155 \begin_layout Standard
28156 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28158 \begin_inset Flex URL
28161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28163 https://www.lyx.org
28171 \begin_layout Standard
28172 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28178 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28182 \begin_layout Standard
28183 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28191 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28200 \begin_layout Subsection
28202 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28204 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28211 \begin_layout Standard
28212 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28214 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28217 or with the toolbar button
28224 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28233 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28234 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28235 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28237 name "LyX's homepage"
28238 target "https://www.lyx.org"
28243 , an Email address like this:
28244 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28246 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28247 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28253 , or a link to a file.
28258 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28266 \begin_layout Standard
28267 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28280 to the link target.
28283 \begin_layout Standard
28284 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28285 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28286 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28287 the text style dialog.
28288 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28292 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28294 name "LyX's homepage"
28295 target "https://www.lyx.org"
28303 \begin_layout Standard
28304 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28308 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28310 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28311 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28315 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28317 \begin_inset Newline newline
28325 \begin_inset Newline newline
28332 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28335 \begin_layout Section
28337 \begin_inset Index idx
28340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28347 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28349 name "sec:Appendices"
28356 \begin_layout Standard
28357 Appendices are created with the menu
28359 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28361 \begin_inset space ~
28365 \begin_inset space ~
28371 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28372 as the appendix part of the book.
28373 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28376 \begin_layout Standard
28377 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28378 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28379 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28380 and the subsection number.
28381 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28385 \begin_layout Standard
28387 \begin_inset space ~
28391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28393 reference "chap:Credits"
28398 \begin_inset space ~
28402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28404 reference "subsec:Export"
28411 \begin_layout Section
28413 \begin_inset Index idx
28416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28423 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28425 name "sec:Bibliography"
28432 \begin_layout Standard
28433 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28435 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
28436 \begin_inset space ~
28440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28442 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28449 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28454 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
28455 \begin_inset space ~
28459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28461 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28466 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28467 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
28468 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
28472 using a bibliography database.
28475 \begin_layout Standard
28476 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28477 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28481 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28482 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28483 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28484 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28485 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28488 \begin_layout Subsection
28489 The Bibliography Environment
28490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28492 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28499 \begin_layout Standard
28504 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28506 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28515 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28517 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28518 of ASCII characters only.
28522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28524 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28527 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
28533 \begin_inset Newline newline
28537 \begin_inset Flex URL
28540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28542 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
28554 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28564 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28565 \begin_inset Newline newline
28572 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
28573 the number of the entry.
28578 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28587 \begin_layout Standard
28588 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28590 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28593 or the toolbar button
28596 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28600 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28601 containing the available citations.
28602 Select one or more keys from the list and
28612 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28613 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28617 \begin_layout Standard
28618 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
28619 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
28620 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28632 \begin_layout Standard
28636 Companion Second Edition
28639 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28641 key "latexcompanion"
28649 \begin_layout Standard
28650 The \SpecialChar LyX
28651 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28652 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28662 \begin_layout Standard
28663 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28670 \begin_inset Index idx
28673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28681 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28693 Author A and Author B(Year)
28694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28701 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28703 Then, if you select
28706 \begin_inset space ~
28711 in the document settings
28712 \begin_inset Index idx
28715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28716 Document ! Settings
28723 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28725 \begin_inset space ~
28731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28733 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28740 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28743 \begin_layout Standard
28744 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28747 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28749 \begin_inset space ~
28757 arg "layout-paragraph"
28761 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28764 \begin_layout Subsection
28765 Bibliography databases
28766 \begin_inset Index idx
28769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28770 Bibliography ! Databases
28776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28778 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28785 \begin_layout Standard
28786 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
28791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28792 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28794 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28795 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28800 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28802 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28803 your working field in a database.
28804 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28805 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28806 list for that document.
28807 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28811 \begin_layout Standard
28812 The database is a text file with the file extension
28813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28824 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28825 The format is explained in
28826 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28833 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28835 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28837 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28843 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28844 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28845 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28847 \begin_inset Flex URL
28850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28852 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28860 \begin_layout Standard
28862 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28863 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28864 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28866 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
28868 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
28869 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
28870 Those are addressed by
28875 \begin_inset Index idx
28878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28880 packages ! biblatex
28886 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28887 (although it has been significantly
28888 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28898 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28899 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28900 might conversely fail to correctly
28901 handle databases that use specific
28910 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28914 \begin_layout Standard
28915 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28920 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
28922 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28926 \begin_inset Index idx
28929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28930 Document ! Settings
28942 \begin_inset space ~
28947 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28955 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28956 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28958 \begin_inset Index idx
28961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28962 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28971 \begin_layout Standard
28972 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28975 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28980 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28982 \begin_inset space ~
28988 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
28989 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28997 Add bibliography to TOC
28999 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
29004 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
29005 in the document or just the cited references.
29008 \begin_layout Standard
29009 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29010 style file is a text file with the file extension
29011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29022 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
29023 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29024 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
29025 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
29027 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
29032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29033 For information on how this is done, have a look at
29034 \begin_inset Newline newline
29038 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29040 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
29050 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29055 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
29059 \begin_layout Standard
29060 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
29063 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29065 \begin_inset Index idx
29068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29069 Bibliography ! Biblatex
29075 \begin_inset Index idx
29078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29080 packages ! biblatex
29088 \begin_layout Standard
29089 Accessing a database via
29093 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29096 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29101 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29103 \begin_inset space ~
29109 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29110 you cannot select a
29115 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29119 \begin_layout Standard
29124 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
29126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29137 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
29138 file (text file with the file extension
29139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29150 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29151 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
29153 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
29157 \begin_layout Standard
29162 styles are not set in the
29165 \begin_inset space ~
29170 dialog, but in the document settings.
29171 \begin_inset Index idx
29174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29175 Document ! Settings
29180 However, in the dialog in the
29184 field, which is only visible if you use
29188 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
29189 example how its heading will appear).
29190 These options are deescribed in detail in the
29195 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29205 \begin_layout Standard
29206 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29207 \begin_inset space ~
29211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29213 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29223 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29224 Bibliography Processors
29227 \begin_layout Standard
29228 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29229 uses a bibliography processor,
29230 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
29231 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
29232 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29234 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
29235 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
29238 \begin_layout Standard
29239 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
29241 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29242 You can do this on a general level in
29244 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29245 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29246 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29249 or for individual documents in
29251 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29252 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29256 The following variants are available by default:
29259 \begin_layout Description
29260 biber a specific, modern processor
29261 \begin_inset Index idx
29264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29271 developed exclusively for
29275 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29281 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
29286 makes use of; if you use the
29290 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29297 \begin_layout Description
29298 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29299 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29300 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
29304 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
29307 \begin_layout Description
29308 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29309 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
29313 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
29317 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29321 features are supported.
29324 \begin_layout Standard
29325 By default (with the
29331 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29332 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29345 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29346 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29347 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29350 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29351 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
29364 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29365 -based bibliography styles).
29366 This should suit most needs.
29369 \begin_layout Standard
29370 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29371 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
29372 (in \SpecialChar LyX
29377 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29378 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29379 You can adjust it in
29381 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29382 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29383 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29389 \begin_layout Standard
29390 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
29391 can add below the selection.
29392 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29393 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29399 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29409 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29413 \begin_layout Standard
29415 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29417 These are explained in detail in section
29419 Customizing Bibliographies
29423 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29428 Additional Features
29433 \begin_layout Subsection
29435 \begin_inset Index idx
29438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29439 Bibliography ! Citation format
29445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29447 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29454 \begin_layout Standard
29455 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29456 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29460 \begin_inset space \space{}
29463 numerical citation (as
29464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29471 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
29472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29479 ) or author-year citations (as
29480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29489 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29493 \begin_layout Standard
29494 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
29497 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29498 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29502 \begin_inset Index idx
29505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29506 Document ! Settings
29511 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
29517 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29518 labels, is there to use
29521 \begin_inset space ~
29532 \begin_inset space ~
29537 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29540 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29547 \begin_layout Standard
29548 With a bibliography database (see
29549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29551 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29558 ) one has in contrary to the
29562 environment full access to the formatting styles.
29563 These style formats are available:
29566 \begin_layout Description
29568 \begin_inset space ~
29571 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29572 -based approached without any additional packages
29573 (simple numeric citations).
29576 \begin_layout Description
29577 Biblatex loads the package
29582 \begin_inset Index idx
29585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29587 packages ! biblatex
29592 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
29594 Biblatex citation style
29598 Biblatex bibliography style
29601 Options to the package
29605 can be entered in the
29612 \begin_layout Description
29614 \begin_inset space ~
29618 \begin_inset space ~
29621 mode) loads the package
29625 with the natbib compatibility mode.
29626 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
29638 behavior very closely.
29643 this option has some additional styles.
29648 styles are also supported by this variant.
29651 \begin_layout Description
29653 \begin_inset space ~
29656 (BibTeX) loads the package
29661 \begin_inset Index idx
29664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29671 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29674 \begin_layout Description
29676 \begin_inset space ~
29679 (BibTeX) loads the package
29684 \begin_inset Index idx
29687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29694 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
29697 \begin_layout Standard
29706 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29708 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
29717 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29719 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29720 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
29722 Biblatex citation style
29725 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
29731 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29735 \begin_layout Standard
29736 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29737 are available in the
29742 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
29743 a name prefix such as
29744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29759 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29764 \begin_inset space \space{}
29768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29779 \begin_layout Standard
29780 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
29782 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29786 \begin_inset space \space{}
29789 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29791 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29795 \begin_inset space \space{}
29799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29811 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29815 \begin_inset space ~
29823 \begin_inset space ~
29829 Here is a simple example where the text
29830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29834 \begin_inset space ~
29838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29841 appears after the reference:
29844 \begin_layout Quote
29846 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29849 key "latexcompanion"
29857 \begin_layout Standard
29858 All styles except for
29862 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
29864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29872 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
29876 \begin_layout Standard
29877 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
29878 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
29879 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
29884 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
29885 multi-citation (so-called
29886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29889 qualified citation lists
29890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29896 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
29901 dialog will display three columns in the field
29908 \begin_inset space ~
29916 \begin_inset space ~
29924 \begin_inset space ~
29930 If you double-click on an item's
29933 \begin_inset space ~
29941 \begin_inset space ~
29946 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
29949 General text before
29955 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
29958 \begin_layout Section
29960 \begin_inset Index idx
29963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29970 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29979 \begin_layout Standard
29980 An index entry is created if you use the menu
29982 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29984 \begin_inset space ~
29989 or the toolbar button
29996 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
29997 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
29998 by \SpecialChar LyX
29999 as the index entry.
30002 \begin_layout Standard
30003 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
30005 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30006 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30008 \begin_inset space ~
30014 A light blue box labeled
30015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30026 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
30027 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
30031 \begin_layout Standard
30032 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
30033 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30034 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
30035 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30037 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30039 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
30047 \begin_layout Subsection
30048 Grouping Index Entries
30049 \begin_inset Index idx
30052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30061 \begin_layout Standard
30062 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
30064 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
30065 lists under the entry
30066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30074 First we create the entry
30075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30083 \begin_inset space ~
30087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30089 reference "subsec:Lists"
30094 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
30095 \begin_inset space ~
30099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30101 reference "sec:Itemize"
30105 , we insert the command
30108 \begin_layout Standard
30114 \begin_layout Standard
30118 \begin_layout Standard
30124 \begin_layout Standard
30125 for the enumerated list in section
30126 \begin_inset space ~
30130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30132 reference "sec:Enumerate"
30139 \begin_layout Standard
30140 The exclamation mark
30141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30148 marks the grouping levels.
30149 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30150 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30151 If we don't have an index entry for
30152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30159 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30162 \begin_layout Subsection
30164 \begin_inset Index idx
30167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30168 Index ! Page ranges
30176 \begin_layout Standard
30177 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30179 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30180 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30181 an index entry in section
30182 \begin_inset space ~
30186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30188 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30195 \begin_layout Standard
30198 Paragraph environments|(
30201 \begin_layout Standard
30202 and another entry at the end of section
30203 \begin_inset space ~
30207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30209 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30216 \begin_layout Standard
30219 Paragraph environments|)
30222 \begin_layout Standard
30224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30247 respectively start and end the index range.
30248 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30249 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30250 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30251 An example is the index entry
30252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30255 Document ! Settings
30256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30262 \begin_layout Subsection
30264 \begin_inset Index idx
30267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30268 Index ! Cross referencing
30276 \begin_layout Standard
30277 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30278 We referred for example in the index entry
30279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30287 \begin_inset space ~
30291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30293 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30297 ) to the index entry
30298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30305 in the same section using the entry
30308 \begin_layout Standard
30311 GIF|see{Image formats}
30314 \begin_layout Standard
30315 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30317 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30318 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30321 \begin_layout Subsection
30323 \begin_inset Index idx
30326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30327 Index ! Entry order
30335 \begin_layout Standard
30336 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30337 follow the rules for the index order.
30338 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30344 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30346 \begin_inset space ~
30350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30352 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30361 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30362 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30387 \begin_inset Index idx
30390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30391 Dummy entries ! maïs
30397 \begin_inset Index idx
30400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30401 Dummy entries ! maître
30407 \begin_inset Index idx
30410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30411 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30416 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30417 maïs, maison, maître.
30418 To achieve this, we use the command
30421 \begin_layout Standard
30424 previous entry@current entry
30427 \begin_layout Standard
30428 In our case we want to have
30429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30444 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30447 \begin_layout Standard
30453 \begin_layout Standard
30454 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30455 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30457 See the next subsection for an example.
30460 \begin_layout Subsection
30462 \begin_inset Index idx
30465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30466 Index ! Entry layout
30474 \begin_layout Standard
30475 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30476 \begin_inset Index idx
30479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30482 This is an italic dummy entry
30487 You can also format the page number using the character
30488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30495 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30496 -command without a backslash.
30497 We can write for example
30500 \begin_layout Standard
30503 italic page number:|textit
30506 \begin_layout Standard
30507 to get the page number in italic.
30508 \begin_inset Index idx
30511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30512 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30517 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30518 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30536 \begin_inset space ~
30542 Have a look at section
30543 \begin_inset space ~
30547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30549 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30553 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30557 \begin_layout Standard
30558 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30566 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30570 to generate the index, see section
30571 \begin_inset space ~
30575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30577 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30586 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30591 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30592 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30595 key "latexcompanion"
30608 \begin_layout Standard
30609 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30611 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30612 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30613 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30614 If so, put the following in the preamble
30617 \begin_layout Standard
30629 \begin_layout Standard
30633 \begin_layout Standard
30639 \begin_layout Standard
30640 in the index entry.
30641 \begin_inset Index idx
30644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30645 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30650 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30651 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30652 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30655 \begin_layout Standard
30656 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30657 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30658 a bold font for all index entries.
30659 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30671 documentation for details,
30672 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30674 key "makeindex,xindy"
30682 \begin_layout Subsection
30684 \begin_inset Index idx
30687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30694 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30696 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30703 \begin_layout Standard
30704 If the index generation program
30708 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30709 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30713 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30714 distribution, is used.
30718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30723 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30724 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30725 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30726 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30727 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30737 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30739 dialog, see section
30740 \begin_inset space ~
30744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30746 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30751 The available options are listed and explained in
30752 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30754 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30760 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30764 \begin_layout Standard
30765 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30766 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30769 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30770 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30774 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30775 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30778 \begin_layout Subsection
30782 \begin_layout Standard
30783 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30784 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30792 next to the standard index.
30794 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
30795 that add this feature.
30802 \begin_inset Index idx
30805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30807 packages ! splitidx
30812 package to generate multiple indexes.
30813 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
30818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30819 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
30821 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30829 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30830 style, but it also includes
30831 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
30832 Please consult the package's manual for details.
30840 \begin_layout Standard
30841 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
30842 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
30844 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30845 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30848 and select the option
30850 Use multiple Indexes
30857 already contains the standard index
30858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30866 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
30867 also appear as a heading) to the
30871 input field and press the
30876 The new index now also appears in the list.
30877 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
30878 label color to the new index.
30881 \begin_layout Standard
30882 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
30885 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30892 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
30893 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
30894 are additional features:
30897 \begin_layout Itemize
30898 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
30899 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
30902 \begin_layout Itemize
30903 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
30904 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
30909 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
30910 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
30911 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
30912 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
30915 \begin_layout Itemize
30920 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
30921 code in the name of the index.
30924 \begin_layout Section
30925 Nomenclature/Glossary
30926 \begin_inset Index idx
30929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30936 \begin_inset Index idx
30939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30970 name "sec:Nomenclature"
30977 \begin_layout Standard
30978 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
30979 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
30980 called nomenclature or glossary.
30983 \begin_layout Standard
30984 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30991 \begin_inset Index idx
30994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31002 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31004 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31011 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31015 \begin_layout Standard
31016 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
31017 and then use the menu
31019 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31025 \begin_inset space ~
31030 or the toolbar button
31033 arg "nomencl-insert"
31038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31049 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
31052 \begin_layout Standard
31053 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
31054 The first is the term or
31058 that you wish to define.
31063 of the term or symbol.
31066 \begin_layout Standard
31067 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31075 To use \SpecialChar TeX
31076 code for nomenclature entries the option
31080 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
31088 \begin_layout Subsection
31089 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
31090 \begin_inset Index idx
31093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31094 Nomenclature ! Layout
31102 \begin_layout Standard
31103 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31107 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31114 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31122 \begin_inset Newline newline
31130 \begin_inset Newline newline
31136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31143 character starts/ends the formula.
31144 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31145 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31157 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31167 \begin_layout Standard
31168 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31169 syntax is given in section
31170 \begin_inset space ~
31174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31176 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31183 \begin_layout Standard
31187 \begin_inset space ~
31192 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31194 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31199 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31206 in this document is:
31207 \begin_inset Newline newline
31212 dummy entry for the character
31217 \begin_inset Newline newline
31229 \begin_inset space ~
31239 font use the command
31268 \begin_layout Standard
31269 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31270 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31274 \begin_inset space \space{}
31278 \begin_inset Newline newline
31294 \begin_inset Newline newline
31297 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31298 This command will make the font of all symbols
31305 \begin_inset space ~
31313 \begin_layout Standard
31314 If the characters |
31315 \begin_inset space \space{}
31319 \begin_inset space \space{}
31323 \begin_inset space \space{}
31327 \begin_inset space \space{}
31331 \begin_inset space \space{}
31334 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
31335 code they need to be escaped
31336 by adding a quote character in front of them.
31337 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31338 LatexCommand nomenclature
31339 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31340 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
31348 \begin_layout Subsection
31349 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31350 \begin_inset Index idx
31353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31354 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31362 \begin_layout Standard
31363 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31364 -code of the symbol
31366 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31368 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31371 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31372 LatexCommand nomenclature
31374 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31382 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31386 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31387 LatexCommand nomenclature
31390 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31396 They will be sorted by
31397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31423 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31426 will be sorted before the
31430 since the character
31431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31438 is considered in sorting.
31441 \begin_layout Standard
31442 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31445 \begin_inset space ~
31450 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31451 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31453 For the example given, you can insert
31457 in this field for the
31458 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31465 will be located before
31466 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31472 \begin_layout Standard
31473 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31478 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31488 \begin_layout Subsection
31489 Nomenclature Options
31490 \begin_inset Index idx
31493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31494 Nomenclature ! Options
31500 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31502 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
31509 \begin_layout Standard
31514 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31515 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31518 \begin_layout Description
31519 refeq Appends the phrase
31520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31535 to every nomenclature entry, where
31541 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31544 \begin_layout Description
31545 refpage Appends the phrase
31546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31561 to every nomenclature entry, where
31567 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31570 \begin_layout Description
31571 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31574 \begin_layout Standard
31575 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31576 class options list in the
31578 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31582 In this document the options
31589 \begin_layout Standard
31590 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31596 \begin_layout Standard
31597 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31598 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31603 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31606 \begin_layout Description
31616 \begin_layout Description
31619 nomrefpage Like the
31626 \begin_layout Description
31629 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31638 \begin_layout Description
31642 \begin_inset space ~
31648 \begin_inset space ~
31653 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31656 \begin_layout Standard
31658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31665 are automatically translated for most document languages.
31666 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
31670 \begin_layout Standard
31679 \begin_inset Newline newline
31685 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31689 \begin_inset space ~
31701 unskip, see equation
31704 \begin_inset Newline newline
31711 pagedeclaration}[1]{
31712 \begin_inset Newline newline
31718 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31722 \begin_inset space ~
31739 \begin_layout Standard
31740 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
31743 \begin_inset space ~
31748 in the document settings under
31751 \begin_inset space ~
31759 \begin_layout Standard
31767 \begin_inset Newline newline
31771 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31775 \begin_inset space ~
31787 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
31789 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
31790 \begin_inset Newline newline
31797 pagedeclaration}[1]{
31798 \begin_inset Newline newline
31802 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31806 \begin_inset space ~
31818 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
31823 \begin_layout Subsection
31824 Printing the Nomenclature
31825 \begin_inset Index idx
31828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31829 Nomenclature ! Printing
31837 \begin_layout Standard
31838 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31840 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31841 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31857 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
31858 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
31859 You can choose between these settings:
31862 \begin_layout Description
31863 Default a space of 1
31864 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31870 \begin_layout Description
31872 \begin_inset space ~
31876 \begin_inset space ~
31879 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
31882 \begin_layout Description
31883 Custom custom space
31886 \begin_layout Standard
31887 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
31888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31896 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
31904 For example, in order to change the name to
31908 , add the following line to the preamble:
31911 \begin_layout Standard
31924 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
31927 \begin_layout Standard
31928 When you are using another document language than English, replace
31929 \begin_inset Newline newline
31944 , where *** is the name of the language used.
31947 \begin_layout Subsection
31948 Nomenclature Program
31949 \begin_inset Index idx
31952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31953 Nomenclature ! Program
31959 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31961 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
31968 \begin_layout Standard
31974 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31975 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
31977 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
31982 by adding options, see section
31983 \begin_inset space ~
31987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31989 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31994 The available options are listed and explained in
31995 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31997 key "nomencl,makeindex"
32005 \begin_layout Section
32007 \begin_inset Index idx
32010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32017 \begin_inset Index idx
32020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32021 Document ! Branches
32027 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32029 name "sec:Branches"
32036 \begin_layout Standard
32037 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
32038 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
32039 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
32040 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
32043 \begin_layout Standard
32044 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
32045 allows you to put text into branches.
32046 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
32047 To create a branch, either select the menu
32049 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32050 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
32053 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
32055 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32062 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
32063 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
32064 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
32065 and whether the name of the branch should
32066 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
32067 (see below for an example).
32068 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
32069 to the name of the other) and to add
32070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32078 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32082 \begin_inset space ~
32085 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
32086 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
32089 \begin_layout Standard
32090 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
32091 These boxes are inserted via the menu
32093 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32096 where you can choose a branch.
32097 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
32101 \begin_layout Standard
32102 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
32103 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
32106 \begin_layout Standard
32107 \begin_inset Branch Question
32111 \begin_layout Standard
32116 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
32124 \begin_layout Standard
32125 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32129 \begin_layout Standard
32134 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
32142 \begin_layout Standard
32149 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32150 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32153 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
32154 Consider for example a file
32155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32162 which has the above branches.
32164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32171 is active, the PDF export file would be called
32172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32195 branch were inactive,
32196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32211 branch was active, likewise
32212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32227 branch was active, and
32228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32231 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32235 if both branches were active.
32236 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32237 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32243 \begin_layout Standard
32244 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
32250 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32251 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
32255 \begin_inset space ~
32263 \begin_layout Standard
32264 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32268 \begin_layout Standard
32274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32281 branch is deactivated.
32287 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32293 \begin_layout Standard
32294 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32295 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32296 definitions for each branch.
32297 For example you can define for the question branch
32301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32302 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32303 -syntax, see section
32304 \begin_inset space ~
32308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32310 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32322 \begin_layout Standard
32332 \begin_layout Standard
32342 \begin_layout Standard
32343 and for the answer branch
32346 \begin_layout Standard
32356 \begin_layout Standard
32366 \begin_layout Standard
32367 \begin_inset Branch Question
32371 \begin_layout Standard
32375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32403 \begin_layout Standard
32404 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32408 \begin_layout Standard
32412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32440 \begin_layout Standard
32441 Now it is possible to use the
32445 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32452 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32455 commands to obtain conditional output.
32456 Here is an example formula where only the
32463 \begin_inset Formula
32465 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32473 \begin_layout Standard
32474 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32482 \begin_layout Standard
32483 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32489 \begin_inset space \space{}
32492 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32494 For this advanced usage, see the
32500 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32505 \begin_layout Section
32507 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32509 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32514 \begin_inset Index idx
32517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32526 \begin_layout Standard
32529 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32530 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32533 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32535 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32541 \begin_inset Index idx
32544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32546 packages ! hyperref
32551 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32552 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32553 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32554 part of the document.
32558 \begin_layout Standard
32559 The header information in the dialog tab
32563 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32564 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32565 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32566 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32570 \begin_inset space ~
32574 \begin_inset space ~
32579 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32580 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32581 and author entries.
32585 \begin_inset space ~
32589 \begin_inset space ~
32593 \begin_inset space ~
32598 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32601 \begin_layout Standard
32602 You can specify in the dialog tab
32606 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32611 \begin_inset space ~
32615 \begin_inset space ~
32619 \begin_inset space ~
32624 option allows long links to be split;
32627 \begin_inset space ~
32631 \begin_inset space ~
32635 \begin_inset space ~
32643 \begin_inset space ~
32648 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32651 \begin_inset space ~
32656 colors the different links.
32657 The default colors are:
32660 \begin_layout Labeling
32661 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32666 for hyperlinks and URLs
32669 \begin_layout Labeling
32670 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32678 \begin_layout Labeling
32679 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32687 \begin_layout Standard
32688 but you can change these in the field
32693 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32696 \begin_layout Standard
32699 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32702 \begin_layout Standard
32707 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32708 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32709 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32712 \begin_layout Standard
32717 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32718 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32719 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32729 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32730 when opening the PDF.
32732 \begin_inset space ~
32735 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32736 \begin_inset space ~
32739 1 will only display the sections.
32742 \begin_layout Standard
32743 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32744 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32750 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32751 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32761 \begin_layout Section
32763 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32767 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32774 \begin_layout Subsection
32777 \begin_inset Index idx
32780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32788 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32790 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32797 \begin_layout Standard
32798 As \SpecialChar LyX
32799 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32800 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32801 commands and constructs,
32804 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32805 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32806 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32807 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32808 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32809 cannot support all packages and
32813 \begin_layout Standard
32814 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32815 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32816 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32820 Code box is created by the menu
32822 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32824 \begin_inset space ~
32829 or by the toolbar button
32842 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32850 \begin_layout Standard
32851 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32853 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32855 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
32859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32860 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
32865 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32872 , you can write the command part
32878 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32879 Code box before the word and the closing brace
32883 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
32884 Code box behind the word.
32885 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
32886 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
32890 \begin_layout Standard
32891 \begin_inset Graphics
32892 filename clipart/ERT.png
32900 \begin_layout Standard
32904 \begin_layout Standard
32905 This is a line with a
32909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32932 \begin_layout Standard
32933 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32941 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32942 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
32943 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
32944 know that the command is finished.
32952 \begin_layout Subsection
32953 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32955 \begin_inset Argument 1
32958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32959 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32966 \begin_inset Index idx
32969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32977 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32979 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32986 \begin_layout Standard
32987 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
32988 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32989 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
32990 uses in the background.
32991 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
32992 is based on commands, you can
32993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33001 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
33002 any time if you know the right commands.
33003 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
33004 is the end of the day.
33005 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
33006 all caption labels bold.
33007 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
33009 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
33013 \begin_layout Standard
33014 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
33016 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33018 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33021 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33031 \begin_layout Standard
33032 As result you find that the package
33037 \begin_inset Index idx
33040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33048 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
33050 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33053 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33057 \begin_inset space ~
33065 \begin_layout Standard
33070 usepackage[options]{package name}
33073 \begin_layout Standard
33074 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
33075 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
33076 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
33077 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
33080 \begin_layout Standard
33081 In your case the package name is
33086 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
33091 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
33092 So you add the command
33095 \begin_layout Standard
33100 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
33103 \begin_layout Standard
33104 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
33108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33109 For more commands provided by the
33113 package, have a look at its documentation,
33114 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33129 \begin_layout Standard
33130 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
33132 For example if you use a
33136 class, you don't need the package
33140 , you can instead write
33143 \begin_layout Standard
33148 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
33153 \begin_layout Standard
33154 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
33155 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
33156 documentation of the document class you want to use.
33163 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
33166 \begin_layout Standard
33167 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
33168 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
33170 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33171 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
33172 Code box as described in the previous
33176 \begin_layout Standard
33177 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
33178 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33181 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33183 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
33191 \begin_layout Standard
33192 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33198 \begin_layout Standard
33202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33212 \begin_inset Note Note
33215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33216 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
33224 \begin_layout Left Header
33225 \begin_inset Argument 1
33228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33248 \begin_inset Note Note
33251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33252 defines the header line as described below
33260 \begin_layout Center Header
33261 \begin_inset Argument 1
33264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33273 \begin_layout Right Header
33274 \begin_inset Argument 1
33277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33298 \begin_layout Left Footer
33299 \begin_inset Argument 1
33302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33323 \begin_layout Center Footer
33324 \begin_inset Argument 1
33327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33339 \begin_inset Newline newline
33343 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33349 \begin_layout Right Footer
33350 \begin_inset Argument 1
33353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33375 \begin_layout Section
33376 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33379 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33384 \begin_inset Index idx
33387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33388 Document ! Header/Footer line
33394 \begin_inset Index idx
33397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33406 \begin_layout Standard
33407 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33411 \begin_inset space ~
33422 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33428 \begin_inset space ~
33434 As a second step add in the menu
33436 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33437 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33446 Custom Header/Footerlines
33449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33453 This module offers the following 6
33454 \begin_inset space ~
33460 \begin_layout Description
33462 \begin_inset space ~
33466 \begin_inset space ~
33470 \begin_inset space ~
33474 \begin_inset space ~
33478 \begin_inset space ~
33484 \begin_layout Description
33486 \begin_inset space ~
33490 \begin_inset space ~
33494 \begin_inset space ~
33498 \begin_inset space ~
33502 \begin_inset space ~
33508 \begin_layout Standard
33509 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33510 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33513 \begin_layout Standard
33514 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33515 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33517 \begin_inset space ~
33521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33523 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33527 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33530 \begin_layout Standard
33531 \begin_inset Float figure
33537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33540 \begin_inset Tabular
33541 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33542 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33543 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33544 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33545 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33547 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33565 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33576 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33594 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33605 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33609 The normal text on the page goes here.
33610 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33612 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33613 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33618 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33627 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33638 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33656 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33667 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33685 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33703 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33706 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33708 name "fig:Page-layout"
33712 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33725 \begin_layout Standard
33726 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33734 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33738 \begin_inset space ~
33743 is set to “Default”.
33744 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33753 \begin_layout Subsection
33757 \begin_layout Standard
33758 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33759 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33760 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33761 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33763 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33765 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33768 \begin_layout Standard
33769 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33770 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33774 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33776 \begin_inset space ~
33784 \begin_layout Description
33787 thepage prints the current page number
33790 \begin_layout Description
33793 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33796 \begin_layout Description
33799 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33802 \begin_layout Description
33805 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33806 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33813 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33816 because it usually goes in a left header.
33819 \begin_layout Description
33822 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33823 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33825 It is normally used in the right header.
33828 \begin_layout Subsection
33829 Default header/footer
33832 \begin_layout Standard
33833 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33834 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33835 footer has the page number.
33836 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33837 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33838 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33841 \begin_inset space ~
33849 \begin_layout Subsection
33853 \begin_layout Standard
33854 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33855 Some pages are different.
33856 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33857 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33858 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33859 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33860 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33863 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33864 Header and footer decoration line
33867 \begin_layout Standard
33868 By default, you get a 0.4
33869 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33872 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33873 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
33885 in the following way:
33888 \begin_layout Standard
33895 headrulewidth}{thickness}
33898 \begin_layout Standard
33899 where thickness is a size in standard units like
33912 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
33913 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33919 \begin_layout Standard
33920 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33922 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
33923 \begin_inset space ~
33927 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33937 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33938 Several header/footer lines
33941 \begin_layout Standard
33942 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
33943 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
33944 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
33946 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33961 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33962 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33964 \begin_inset space ~
33972 \begin_layout Standard
33979 headheight}{height}
33982 \begin_layout Standard
33987 is a size in standard units (e.
33988 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33992 \begin_inset space \space{}
34000 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
34001 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
34002 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34003 logfile with the menu
34005 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34007 \begin_inset space ~
34015 \begin_inset space ~
34020 to see if you can find a warning about the package
34025 \begin_inset Index idx
34028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34030 packages ! fancyhdr
34036 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
34037 for your header/footer.
34040 \begin_layout Subsection
34044 \begin_layout Standard
34045 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
34046 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
34047 This example consists of the following definition:
34050 \begin_layout Description
34052 \begin_inset space ~
34061 , empty optional argument
34064 \begin_layout Description
34066 \begin_inset space ~
34069 Header empty, empty optional argument
34072 \begin_layout Description
34074 \begin_inset space ~
34083 in the optional argument
34086 \begin_layout Description
34088 \begin_inset space ~
34097 in the optional argument
34100 \begin_layout Description
34102 \begin_inset space ~
34115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34119 \begin_inset Newline newline
34123 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34130 in the optional argument
34133 \begin_layout Description
34135 \begin_inset space ~
34144 , empty optional argument
34147 \begin_layout Description
34150 headrulewidth set to 2
34151 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34157 \begin_layout Standard
34158 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
34159 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
34165 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34175 \begin_layout Standard
34176 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34182 \begin_layout Standard
34186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34190 pagestyle{headings}
34196 \begin_inset Note Note
34199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34200 switches back to page style with the default headings
34208 \begin_layout Section
34209 Previewing Snippets of your Document
34210 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34212 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34217 \begin_inset Index idx
34220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34227 \begin_inset Index idx
34230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34239 \begin_layout Standard
34241 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34242 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34243 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34246 \begin_layout Subsection
34250 \begin_layout Standard
34251 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34257 \begin_inset Index idx
34260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34262 packages ! preview-latex
34267 (on some systems named simply
34272 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34274 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34281 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34283 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34291 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34292 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34293 -package are automatically
34294 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34298 \begin_layout Subsection
34302 \begin_layout Standard
34303 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34304 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34306 activate the option
34309 \begin_inset space ~
34316 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34322 \begin_inset space ~
34326 \begin_inset space ~
34329 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34336 \begin_inset space ~
34349 \begin_inset space ~
34354 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34357 \begin_layout Standard
34358 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34363 \begin_inset space ~
34371 \begin_inset space ~
34379 \begin_layout Standard
34380 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34381 and when you finish
34385 \begin_layout Standard
34386 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34394 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34395 generated by activating the option
34398 \begin_inset space ~
34404 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34412 \begin_layout Subsection
34413 Selected document parts
34416 \begin_layout Standard
34417 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34418 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34419 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34420 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34422 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34424 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34428 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34429 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34430 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34433 \begin_layout Standard
34434 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34441 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34453 is explained in section
34455 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34460 \begin_inset space ~
34470 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34471 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34472 the final rotated boxes,
34473 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34474 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34476 Here is the result:
34479 \begin_layout Standard
34480 \begin_inset Preview
34482 \begin_layout Standard
34487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34491 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34497 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34507 height_special "totalheight"
34512 backgroundcolor "none"
34515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34540 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34546 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34568 \begin_layout Standard
34569 Previewing works also for colors.
34570 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34589 is explained in section
34596 \begin_inset space ~
34609 \begin_layout Standard
34610 \begin_inset Preview
34612 \begin_layout Standard
34616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34635 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34640 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34659 \begin_layout Standard
34660 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34666 \begin_layout Standard
34667 If \SpecialChar LyX
34668 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34669 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34670 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34671 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34672 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34673 the \SpecialChar TeX
34675 If \SpecialChar LyX
34676 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34677 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34679 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34680 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34681 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34684 \begin_layout Subsection
34689 \begin_layout Standard
34690 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34691 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34694 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34696 \begin_inset space ~
34701 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34703 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34705 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34706 's main window, then only this selection
34707 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34708 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34709 the source view window.
34714 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34715 ; but note that if you have
34716 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34718 not just the one which is open at the time.
34721 \begin_layout Section
34722 Advanced Find and Replace
34723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34725 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34730 \begin_inset Index idx
34733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34740 \begin_inset Index idx
34743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34752 \begin_layout Subsection
34756 \begin_layout Standard
34757 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34758 allows for searching of complex,
34759 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34761 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34762 The key-features are:
34765 \begin_layout Itemize
34766 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34767 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34768 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34772 \begin_layout Itemize
34773 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34774 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34775 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34776 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34779 \begin_layout Itemize
34780 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34781 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34782 outside of mathematics environments
34785 \begin_layout Itemize
34786 Search may be widened to a specific
34791 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34795 \begin_inset space ~
34798 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34799 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34806 \begin_layout Itemize
34807 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34808 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34813 \begin_inset space ~
34816 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34819 \begin_layout Subsection
34823 \begin_layout Standard
34824 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34826 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34839 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34842 ) or the toolbar button
34845 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34851 Advanced Find and Replace
34856 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34860 \begin_layout Standard
34866 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34870 \begin_inset space ~
34875 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34878 arg "paragraph-break"
34882 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34883 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
34887 arg "paragraph-break"
34890 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
34894 searches backwards.
34897 \begin_layout Standard
34901 \begin_inset space ~
34906 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
34915 \begin_inset space ~
34920 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
34923 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34924 Searching for mathematics
34927 \begin_layout Standard
34928 Mathematical formulas, such as
34929 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
34932 or something more complex like
34933 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
34936 , may be searched for by typing them in the
34941 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
34942 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
34943 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
34944 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
34950 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34954 \begin_layout Standard
34955 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
34956 This is done by switching to the
34960 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
34965 This way, entering in the
34972 \begin_layout Itemize
34973 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
34974 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
34977 \begin_layout Itemize
34978 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
34979 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
34982 \begin_layout Itemize
34983 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
34984 of it only within section headings.
34985 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
34986 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
34990 \begin_layout Itemize
34991 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
34992 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
34995 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34999 \begin_layout Standard
35000 The entries made in the
35004 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
35007 \begin_inset space ~
35013 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
35017 button or alternatively press
35020 arg "paragraph-break"
35027 while the cursor is in the
35030 \begin_inset space ~
35038 \begin_layout Standard
35039 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
35041 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
35045 \begin_layout Itemize
35046 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
35047 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
35048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35055 with its typewriter version
35056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35070 \begin_layout Itemize
35071 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
35073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35077 \begin_inset Formula $R$
35081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35089 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
35093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35096 (you may want to enable the
35099 \begin_inset space ~
35107 \begin_inset space ~
35112 options and disable the
35120 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
35121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35128 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
35129 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
35133 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
35136 , or occurrences of
35137 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
35141 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
35147 \begin_layout Subsection
35151 \begin_layout Standard
35152 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
35156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35157 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
35159 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35161 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
35171 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
35177 This is done with the context menu
35179 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35180 Insert Regular Expression
35182 while the cursor is in the
35187 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
35188 expression matching rules
35192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35193 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
35196 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35200 \begin_inset space ~
35203 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
35204 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
35210 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
35211 same text in the document.
35212 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
35213 Examples of using such a feature may be:
35216 \begin_layout Enumerate
35217 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
35222 editor the fraction
35223 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
35227 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35230 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35231 fractions with the given denominator.
35234 \begin_layout Enumerate
35235 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35247 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35252 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35253 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35254 Also, by inserting a
35255 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35258 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35259 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35262 \begin_layout Standard
35263 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35264 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35265 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35268 , and referring back to them through
35269 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35273 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35277 For example, try searching with the regexp
35278 \begin_inset Newline newline
35281 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35284 \begin_inset Newline newline
35287 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35290 \begin_layout Standard
35291 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35294 \begin_layout Standard
35295 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35303 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35304 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35305 sub-expressions is absolute.
35307 \begin_inset space ~
35311 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35314 always refers to the first occurrence of
35315 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35318 in all entered regexps.
35326 \begin_layout Section
35328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35330 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35335 \begin_inset Index idx
35338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35347 \begin_layout Standard
35349 has a built-in spell checker.
35352 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35359 key or the toolbar button
35362 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35365 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35366 beginning of the currently selected text.
35367 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35368 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35369 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35370 scrolled so that it is visible.
35371 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35372 n, if any could be found.
35373 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35377 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35378 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35381 \begin_layout Standard
35382 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35385 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35389 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35390 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35392 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35393 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35396 \begin_inset space ~
35404 arg "dialog-show character"
35407 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35409 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35412 \begin_layout Standard
35413 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35414 can be downloaded from here:
35415 \begin_inset Newline newline
35419 \begin_inset Flex URL
35422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35424 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35430 \begin_inset Newline newline
35434 \begin_inset space ~
35437 files for each language.
35438 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35439 \begin_inset space ~
35442 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35443 's installation subfolder
35451 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35453 \begin_inset Newline newline
35456 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35457 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35458 but in most cases these are
35474 is the language code.
35477 \begin_layout Subsection
35481 \begin_layout Standard
35484 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35485 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35487 \begin_inset space ~
35490 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35493 you can set the following things:
35496 \begin_layout Description
35498 \begin_inset space ~
35501 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35502 should use for spell checking.
35503 Depending on your platform,
35513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35514 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35515 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35530 \begin_inset space ~
35533 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35536 \begin_layout Description
35538 \begin_inset space ~
35541 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35542 will always use the given language
35543 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35546 \begin_layout Description
35548 \begin_inset space ~
35551 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35553 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35557 \begin_inset space \space{}
35561 This should normally not be needed.
35564 \begin_layout Description
35566 \begin_inset space ~
35570 \begin_inset space ~
35573 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35585 \begin_layout Description
35587 \begin_inset space ~
35590 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35591 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35592 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35593 appear in a context menu.
35594 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35598 \begin_layout Description
35600 \begin_inset space ~
35604 \begin_inset space ~
35608 \begin_inset space ~
35611 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35615 \begin_layout Section
35617 \begin_inset Index idx
35620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35629 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35636 \begin_layout Standard
35638 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35639 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35649 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35651 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35661 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35663 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35664 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35665 which are available for many languages.
35668 \begin_layout Standard
35669 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35670 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35674 \begin_layout Subsection
35675 Setting up the thesaurus
35678 \begin_layout Standard
35687 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35691 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35696 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35698 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35702 \begin_inset space ~
35710 For instance, the US English files are named:
35713 \begin_layout Itemize
35717 \begin_layout Itemize
35721 \begin_layout Standard
35730 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35731 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35734 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35735 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35736 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35738 \begin_inset space ~
35743 ) to the path where they are installed.
35747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35748 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35749 ies, typical locations are
35755 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35759 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35763 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35766 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35772 LibreOffice-<Version>
35779 On the Mac, the default location is
35781 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35782 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35783 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35784 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35785 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35786 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35794 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35795 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35796 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35800 \begin_layout Standard
35801 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35802 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35804 \begin_inset Newline newline
35808 \begin_inset Flex URL
35811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35813 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
35821 \begin_layout Standard
35822 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35823 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35825 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35826 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35827 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35829 \begin_inset space ~
35834 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35836 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35837 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35841 \begin_layout Standard
35842 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35844 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35847 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35853 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35856 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35857 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35859 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35865 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35866 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35867 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35869 \begin_inset space ~
35874 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35877 \begin_layout Subsection
35878 Using the thesaurus
35881 \begin_layout Standard
35882 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35884 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35887 or the toolbar button
35890 arg "thesaurus-entry"
35893 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
35895 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
35897 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
35898 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
35899 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
35908 ), related terms (such as
35911 \begin_inset space ~
35920 ), compounds (such as
35923 \begin_inset space ~
35932 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
35941 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
35944 \begin_layout Standard
35945 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
35946 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
35950 \begin_layout Standard
35951 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
35952 the dictionary, such as the above
35956 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
35957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35961 \begin_inset space \space{}
35964 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
35965 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
35966 For example, looking up the word form
35970 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
35975 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
35976 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35980 \begin_inset space \space{}
35991 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
35992 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
35993 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
35996 \begin_layout Section
35998 \begin_inset Index idx
36001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36008 \begin_inset Index idx
36011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36012 Document ! Change Tracking
36018 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36020 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
36027 \begin_layout Standard
36028 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
36029 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
36030 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
36031 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
36033 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36035 \begin_inset space ~
36038 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36040 \begin_inset space ~
36048 \begin_layout Standard
36049 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
36063 The color depends on the author that made the change.
36064 You can change the color in
36066 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36067 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36069 \begin_inset space ~
36073 \begin_inset space ~
36078 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36084 \begin_inset Index idx
36087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36088 Color ! Change tracking
36093 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
36094 's status bar when the
36095 cursor is in changed text.
36096 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
36099 arg "changes-merge"
36105 \begin_layout Standard
36106 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
36108 \begin_inset Index idx
36111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36120 \begin_layout Standard
36121 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36127 \begin_layout Standard
36128 \begin_inset Graphics
36129 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
36137 \begin_layout Standard
36138 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36144 \begin_layout Standard
36145 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
36148 \begin_layout Standard
36149 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36155 \begin_layout Standard
36156 \begin_inset Tabular
36157 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
36158 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36159 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36160 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36161 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36170 arg "changes-track"
36178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36184 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36186 \begin_inset space ~
36189 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36191 \begin_inset space ~
36200 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36209 arg "changes-output"
36217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36223 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36225 \begin_inset space ~
36228 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36230 \begin_inset space ~
36234 \begin_inset space ~
36238 \begin_inset space ~
36247 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36268 Jumps to the next change
36274 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36283 arg "change-accept"
36291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36297 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36299 \begin_inset space ~
36302 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36304 \begin_inset space ~
36313 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36322 arg "change-reject"
36330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36336 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36338 \begin_inset space ~
36341 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36343 \begin_inset space ~
36352 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36361 arg "changes-merge"
36369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36375 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36377 \begin_inset space ~
36380 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36382 \begin_inset space ~
36391 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36400 arg "all-changes-accept"
36408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36414 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36416 \begin_inset space ~
36419 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36421 \begin_inset space ~
36425 \begin_inset space ~
36434 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36443 arg "all-changes-reject"
36451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36457 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36459 \begin_inset space ~
36462 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36464 \begin_inset space ~
36468 \begin_inset space ~
36477 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36500 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36501 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36503 \begin_inset space ~
36512 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36535 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36537 \begin_inset space ~
36553 \begin_layout Standard
36554 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36560 \begin_layout Standard
36561 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36581 \begin_layout Standard
36582 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36583 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36584 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36585 the next change after the current cursor position.
36586 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36587 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36588 step to the next change.
36589 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36592 \begin_layout Standard
36593 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36594 to describe a change.
36597 \begin_layout Standard
36598 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36604 \begin_inset Index idx
36607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36615 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36617 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36624 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36628 \begin_layout Section
36629 Comparison of Documents
36630 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36632 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36637 \begin_inset Index idx
36640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36641 Comparison of documents
36649 \begin_layout Standard
36650 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36653 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36657 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36658 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36660 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36662 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36666 \begin_inset space ~
36670 \begin_inset space ~
36674 \begin_inset space ~
36683 \begin_inset space ~
36687 \begin_inset space ~
36691 \begin_inset space ~
36695 \begin_inset space ~
36699 \begin_inset space ~
36703 \begin_inset space ~
36708 enables the change tracking option
36711 \begin_inset space ~
36715 \begin_inset space ~
36719 \begin_inset space ~
36724 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36727 \begin_layout Section
36728 International Support
36729 \begin_inset Index idx
36732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36733 International support
36741 \begin_layout Standard
36742 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36743 with any language you want.
36744 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36745 up \SpecialChar LyX
36747 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36749 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
36757 \begin_layout Standard
36758 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36759 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36760 \begin_inset space ~
36764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36766 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36773 \begin_layout Subsection
36775 \begin_inset Index idx
36778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36785 \begin_inset Index idx
36788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36789 Document ! Settings
36795 \begin_inset Index idx
36798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36799 Document ! Language
36807 \begin_layout Standard
36810 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36811 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36814 dialog lets you set
36816 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36821 \begin_layout Standard
36826 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36831 \begin_inset space ~
36836 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36837 For details about the different encoding options see section
36838 \begin_inset space ~
36842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36844 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36851 \begin_layout Subsection
36852 Keyboard mapping configuration
36853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36855 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36862 \begin_layout Standard
36863 If you have for example a U.
36864 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36867 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36868 can use an alternate keymap.
36869 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36874 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36875 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36876 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36879 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36880 \begin_inset space ~
36884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36886 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
36891 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
36892 which one you want to use.
36895 \begin_layout Standard
36896 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
36897 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
36898 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
36899 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36902 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
36903 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
36904 one to support the characters you want.
36905 This and many other customizations are explained in the
36912 \begin_layout Chapter
36915 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36917 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
36924 \begin_layout Standard
36925 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
36926 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
36927 topic inside the user's guide.
36930 \begin_layout Section
36932 \begin_inset Index idx
36935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36944 \begin_layout Standard
36949 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
36952 \begin_layout Subsection
36956 \begin_layout Standard
36957 Creates a new document.
36960 \begin_layout Subsection
36964 \begin_layout Standard
36965 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
36966 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
36967 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
36970 \begin_layout Subsection
36974 \begin_layout Standard
36978 \begin_layout Subsection
36982 \begin_layout Standard
36983 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
36984 Click there on a file to open it.
36987 \begin_layout Subsection
36991 \begin_layout Standard
36992 Closes the current document.
36995 \begin_layout Subsection
36999 \begin_layout Standard
37000 Closes all opened documents.
37003 \begin_layout Subsection
37007 \begin_layout Standard
37008 Saves the actual document.
37011 \begin_layout Subsection
37015 \begin_layout Standard
37016 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
37019 \begin_layout Subsection
37023 \begin_layout Standard
37024 Saves all opened documents.
37027 \begin_layout Subsection
37031 \begin_layout Standard
37032 Reloads the actual document from disk.
37035 \begin_layout Subsection
37039 \begin_layout Standard
37040 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
37041 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
37042 It is described in the section
37044 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
37049 Additional Features
37054 \begin_layout Subsection
37058 \begin_layout Standard
37059 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
37060 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
37062 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
37063 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
37067 \begin_layout Standard
37068 When using the menu entry
37071 \begin_inset space ~
37076 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
37080 \begin_inset space ~
37084 \begin_inset space ~
37088 \begin_inset space ~
37093 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
37094 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
37097 \begin_layout Subsection
37099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37101 name "subsec:Export"
37108 \begin_layout Standard
37109 You can export your document to various file formats.
37110 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
37112 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
37113 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
37114 during its configuration.
37117 \begin_layout Standard
37118 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
37120 \begin_inset space ~
37124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37126 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
37133 \begin_layout Description
37139 \begin_inset space ~
37142 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
37144 \begin_inset space ~
37147 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
37148 \begin_inset Newline newline
37151 Since \SpecialChar LyX
37152 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
37156 \begin_layout Description
37157 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
37163 \begin_layout Description
37165 \begin_inset space ~
37168 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
37174 \begin_layout Description
37175 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
37176 's native DVI-format.
37177 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
37178 files paths or file names in your document.
37180 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
37187 \begin_layout Description
37188 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
37189 in files paths or file names
37192 \begin_layout Description
37194 \begin_inset space ~
37201 ) DVI-format using the program
37203 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37206 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
37210 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37218 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37226 \begin_layout Description
37228 \begin_inset space ~
37231 (cropped) the same as
37235 but with cropped page margins.
37238 \begin_layout Description
37240 \begin_inset space ~
37243 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37247 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37252 \begin_layout Description
37256 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37264 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37272 \begin_layout Description
37274 \begin_inset space ~
37278 \begin_inset space ~
37281 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37285 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37293 \begin_layout Description
37297 \begin_inset space ~
37306 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37307 source that is compilable with the program
37309 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37313 \begin_layout Description
37317 \begin_inset space ~
37322 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37323 source, additionally all images used in the document
37324 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37328 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37331 \begin_layout Description
37335 \begin_inset space ~
37340 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37341 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37342 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37350 \begin_layout Description
37354 \begin_inset space ~
37363 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37364 source that is compilable with the program
37370 \begin_layout Description
37372 \begin_inset space ~
37376 \begin_inset space ~
37383 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37384 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37390 \begin_layout Description
37392 \begin_inset space ~
37395 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37396 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37402 \begin_inset space \space{}
37407 \begin_inset space ~
37411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37426 represent the version number)
37429 \begin_layout Description
37431 \begin_inset space ~
37435 \begin_inset space ~
37438 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37439 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37440 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37444 \begin_layout Description
37445 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37446 's internal XHTML engine
37449 \begin_layout Description
37451 \begin_inset space ~
37455 \begin_inset space ~
37459 \begin_inset space ~
37463 \begin_inset space ~
37466 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37471 For the conversion the program
37480 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37483 \begin_layout Description
37484 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37489 \begin_layout Description
37491 \begin_inset space ~
37494 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37496 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37499 For the conversion the program
37508 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37511 \begin_layout Description
37513 \begin_inset space ~
37516 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37517 For the conversion the program
37526 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37529 \begin_layout Description
37531 \begin_inset space ~
37534 (cropped) the same as
37537 \begin_inset space ~
37542 but with cropped page margins
37545 \begin_layout Description
37549 \begin_inset space ~
37554 PDF-format using the program
37558 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37561 \begin_layout Description
37565 \begin_inset space ~
37569 \begin_inset space ~
37577 \begin_inset space ~
37582 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37583 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37587 \begin_inset space \space{}
37590 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37594 \begin_layout Description
37598 \begin_inset space ~
37603 PDF-format using the program
37605 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37608 , produces PDF-files directly
37611 \begin_layout Description
37615 \begin_inset space ~
37620 PDF-format using the program
37624 , produces PDF-files directly
37627 \begin_layout Description
37631 \begin_inset space ~
37636 PDF-format using the program
37640 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37643 \begin_layout Description
37647 \begin_inset space ~
37652 PDF-format using the program
37657 , produces PDF-files directly
37660 \begin_layout Description
37664 \begin_inset space ~
37672 \begin_layout Description
37676 \begin_inset space ~
37680 \begin_inset space ~
37685 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37686 and then exported as text using the program
37691 \begin_layout Description
37696 PostScript format using the program
37704 options see section
37705 \begin_inset space ~
37709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37711 reference "subsec:General-output"
37718 \begin_layout Description
37719 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37720 source and also code in the statistical programming
37734 it is possible to use
37738 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37742 \begin_layout Standard
37743 If one of the menu entries
37750 \begin_inset space ~
37759 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37761 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37763 \begin_inset space ~
37767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37769 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37774 \begin_inset Index idx
37777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37778 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37787 \begin_layout Subsection
37791 \begin_layout Standard
37792 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37793 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37796 \begin_inset space ~
37800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37802 reference "sec:Paths"
37807 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37816 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37817 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37818 's preferences as described in section
37819 \begin_inset space ~
37823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37825 reference "subsec:Converters"
37832 \begin_layout Subsection
37833 New and Close Window
37836 \begin_layout Standard
37837 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37841 \begin_layout Subsection
37845 \begin_layout Standard
37846 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37849 \begin_layout Section
37851 \begin_inset Index idx
37854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37863 \begin_layout Subsection
37867 \begin_layout Standard
37868 Described in section
37869 \begin_inset space ~
37873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37875 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37882 \begin_layout Subsection
37883 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37886 \begin_layout Standard
37887 Described in section
37888 \begin_inset space ~
37892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37894 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37901 \begin_layout Subsection
37905 \begin_layout Standard
37906 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
37907 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
37910 \begin_layout Subsection
37914 \begin_layout Standard
37915 Selects the whole document.
37918 \begin_layout Subsection
37919 Find & Replace (Quick)
37922 \begin_layout Standard
37923 Described in section
37924 \begin_inset space ~
37928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37930 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37937 \begin_layout Subsection
37938 Find & Replace (Advanced)
37941 \begin_layout Standard
37942 Described in section
37943 \begin_inset space ~
37947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37949 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37956 \begin_layout Subsection
37957 Move Paragraph Up/Down
37960 \begin_layout Standard
37961 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
37965 \begin_layout Subsection
37969 \begin_layout Standard
37970 Described in section
37971 \begin_inset space ~
37975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37977 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
37984 \begin_layout Subsection
37986 \begin_inset Index idx
37989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37990 Paragraph ! Settings
37998 \begin_layout Standard
37999 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
38000 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
38004 \begin_layout Standard
38005 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
38006 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
38012 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38013 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38015 \begin_inset space ~
38023 \begin_layout Subsection
38024 Table and Rows & Columns
38027 \begin_layout Standard
38028 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
38029 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
38030 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
38033 \begin_layout Subsection
38037 \begin_layout Standard
38038 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
38039 It will dissolve this inset.
38040 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
38044 \begin_layout Subsection
38048 \begin_layout Standard
38049 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
38050 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
38053 \begin_layout Subsection
38054 Increase/Decrease List Depth
38057 \begin_layout Standard
38058 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
38060 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
38061 \begin_inset space ~
38065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38067 reference "sec:Nesting"
38072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38074 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
38081 \begin_layout Section
38083 \begin_inset Index idx
38086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38095 \begin_layout Standard
38096 At the bottom of the
38100 menu the opened documents are listed.
38103 \begin_layout Subsection
38104 Open/Close all Insets
38107 \begin_layout Standard
38108 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
38111 \begin_layout Subsection
38112 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
38115 \begin_layout Standard
38116 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
38119 \begin_layout Standard
38120 Math macros are described in the
38127 \begin_layout Subsection
38131 \begin_layout Standard
38132 Shows the outline window as described in sections
38133 \begin_inset space ~
38137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38139 reference "sec:Navigating"
38144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38146 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
38153 \begin_layout Subsection
38157 \begin_layout Standard
38158 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
38160 \begin_inset space ~
38164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38166 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38173 \begin_layout Subsection
38177 \begin_layout Standard
38178 Opens a window showing console messages.
38179 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
38181 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38184 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38185 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
38186 is processing the document.
38189 \begin_layout Subsection
38191 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38193 name "subsec:Toolbars"
38198 \begin_inset Index idx
38201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38210 \begin_layout Standard
38211 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
38213 All toolbars and the
38216 \begin_inset space ~
38221 can be turned on and off.
38226 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38238 \begin_inset space ~
38250 \begin_inset space ~
38255 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38259 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38266 \begin_layout Standard
38271 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38275 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38276 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38277 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38278 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38279 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38282 \begin_layout Standard
38284 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38285 \begin_inset space ~
38289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38291 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38298 \begin_layout Subsection
38302 \begin_layout Standard
38306 \begin_inset space ~
38310 \begin_inset space ~
38314 \begin_inset space ~
38318 \begin_inset space ~
38322 \begin_inset space ~
38326 \begin_inset space ~
38331 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38332 's main window vertically while
38335 \begin_inset space ~
38339 \begin_inset space ~
38343 \begin_inset space ~
38347 \begin_inset space ~
38351 \begin_inset space ~
38355 \begin_inset space ~
38360 will split it horizontally.
38361 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38362 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38363 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38364 three or more documents at the same time.
38365 To close a split view, use the menu
38368 \begin_inset space ~
38372 \begin_inset space ~
38380 \begin_layout Subsection
38384 \begin_layout Standard
38385 Closes a split view.
38388 \begin_layout Subsection
38392 \begin_layout Standard
38393 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38394 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38395 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38396 's main window fullscreen.
38397 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38398 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38401 \begin_layout Section
38403 \begin_inset Index idx
38406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38415 \begin_layout Subsection
38419 \begin_layout Standard
38420 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38421 \begin_inset space ~
38425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38427 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38438 \begin_layout Subsection
38440 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38442 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38449 \begin_layout Standard
38450 Here you can insert the following characters:
38453 \begin_layout Description
38458 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38461 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38462 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38463 -packages you have installed.
38464 You can get a complete display by checking
38467 \begin_inset space ~
38473 \begin_inset Newline newline
38477 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38485 Not all characters will be visible in the
38489 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38490 dialog (see section
38491 \begin_inset space ~
38495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38497 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38501 ) can display every character.
38509 \begin_layout Description
38510 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38514 \begin_layout Description
38516 \begin_inset space ~
38520 \begin_inset space ~
38523 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38524 \begin_inset space ~
38528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38530 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38537 \begin_layout Description
38539 \begin_inset space ~
38542 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38545 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38546 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38552 \begin_layout Description
38554 \begin_inset space ~
38557 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38560 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38561 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38567 \begin_layout Description
38569 \begin_inset space ~
38572 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38576 \begin_layout Description
38578 \begin_inset space ~
38581 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38585 \begin_layout Description
38587 \begin_inset space ~
38590 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38596 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38602 \begin_layout Description
38604 \begin_inset space ~
38607 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38611 \begin_layout Description
38613 \begin_inset space ~
38617 \begin_inset Index idx
38620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38627 \begin_inset Index idx
38630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38631 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38636 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38637 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38639 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38645 \begin_inset Index idx
38648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38656 \begin_inset Newline newline
38659 More information about this feature can be found in the
38665 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38671 \begin_layout Description
38672 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38674 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38675 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38679 \begin_layout Subsection
38683 \begin_layout Standard
38684 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38687 \begin_layout Description
38688 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38689 \begin_inset script superscript
38691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38700 \begin_layout Description
38701 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38702 \begin_inset script subscript
38704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38713 \begin_layout Description
38715 \begin_inset space ~
38718 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38719 \begin_inset space ~
38723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38725 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38732 \begin_layout Description
38734 \begin_inset space ~
38737 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38738 \begin_inset space ~
38742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38744 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38751 \begin_layout Description
38753 \begin_inset space ~
38756 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38757 \begin_inset space ~
38761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38763 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38770 \begin_layout Description
38772 \begin_inset space ~
38775 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38777 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38781 \begin_inset space \space{}
38784 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38785 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38794 To insert a fraction use the command
38799 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38803 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38812 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38819 \begin_layout Description
38821 \begin_inset space ~
38824 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38825 \begin_inset space ~
38829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38831 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38838 \begin_layout Description
38840 \begin_inset space ~
38843 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38844 \begin_inset space ~
38848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38850 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38857 \begin_layout Description
38859 \begin_inset space ~
38862 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38863 \begin_inset space ~
38867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38869 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
38876 \begin_layout Description
38877 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
38878 \begin_inset space ~
38882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38884 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
38891 \begin_layout Description
38893 \begin_inset space ~
38896 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
38897 \begin_inset space ~
38901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38903 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
38910 \begin_layout Description
38912 \begin_inset space ~
38915 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
38916 \begin_inset space ~
38920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38922 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
38929 \begin_layout Description
38931 \begin_inset space ~
38935 \begin_inset space ~
38938 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
38941 \begin_inset space ~
38945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38947 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
38954 for a usage example.
38957 \begin_layout Description
38959 \begin_inset space ~
38963 \begin_inset space ~
38966 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
38967 \begin_inset space ~
38971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38973 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38980 \begin_layout Description
38982 \begin_inset space ~
38985 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
38986 as described in section
38987 \begin_inset space ~
38991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38993 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39000 \begin_layout Description
39002 \begin_inset space ~
39005 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
39006 \begin_inset space ~
39010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39012 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39019 \begin_layout Description
39021 \begin_inset space ~
39024 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
39025 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
39027 \begin_inset space ~
39031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39033 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39040 \begin_layout Description
39042 \begin_inset space ~
39045 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
39046 \begin_inset space ~
39050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39052 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39059 \begin_layout Description
39061 \begin_inset space ~
39065 \begin_inset space ~
39068 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
39069 \begin_inset space ~
39073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39075 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39082 \begin_layout Subsection
39086 \begin_layout Standard
39087 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
39091 \begin_inset space ~
39112 are described in section
39113 \begin_inset space ~
39117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39119 reference "sec:toc"
39128 is described in section
39129 \begin_inset space ~
39133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39135 reference "sec:Index"
39143 is described in section
39144 \begin_inset space ~
39148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39150 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39156 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39159 is described in section
39160 \begin_inset space ~
39164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39166 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
39173 \begin_layout Subsection
39177 \begin_layout Standard
39178 To insert floats, as described in section
39179 \begin_inset space ~
39183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39185 reference "sec:Floats"
39189 and in detail the chapter
39196 \begin_inset space ~
39204 \begin_layout Subsection
39208 \begin_layout Standard
39209 To insert notes, described in section
39210 \begin_inset space ~
39214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39216 reference "sec:Notes"
39223 \begin_layout Subsection
39227 \begin_layout Standard
39228 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39230 Branches are described in section
39231 \begin_inset space ~
39235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39237 reference "sec:Branches"
39244 \begin_layout Subsection
39248 \begin_layout Standard
39249 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39250 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39252 An example is the document class
39253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39260 with three custom insets.
39263 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39267 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39273 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39276 \begin_layout Subsection
39278 \begin_inset Index idx
39281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39290 \begin_layout Standard
39291 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39293 For more information see chapter
39295 External Document Parts
39298 \begin_inset space ~
39304 \begin_layout Subsection
39306 \begin_inset Index idx
39309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39318 \begin_layout Standard
39319 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39320 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39327 \begin_inset space ~
39335 \begin_layout Subsection
39339 \begin_layout Standard
39344 dialog as described in section
39345 \begin_inset space ~
39349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39351 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39358 \begin_layout Subsection
39362 \begin_layout Standard
39367 as described in section
39368 \begin_inset space ~
39372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39374 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39381 \begin_layout Subsection
39385 \begin_layout Standard
39390 as described in section
39391 \begin_inset space ~
39395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39397 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39404 \begin_layout Subsection
39406 \begin_inset Index idx
39409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39416 \begin_inset Index idx
39419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39420 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39428 \begin_layout Standard
39429 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39430 Floats are described in section
39431 \begin_inset space ~
39435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39437 reference "sec:Floats"
39441 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39443 Multi-page Captions
39448 \begin_inset space ~
39456 \begin_layout Subsection
39460 \begin_layout Standard
39461 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39462 \begin_inset space ~
39466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39468 reference "sec:Index"
39475 \begin_layout Subsection
39479 \begin_layout Standard
39480 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39481 \begin_inset space ~
39485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39487 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39494 \begin_layout Subsection
39498 \begin_layout Standard
39499 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39500 Tables are described in section
39501 \begin_inset space ~
39505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39507 reference "sec:Tables"
39511 and in detail in the chapter
39518 \begin_inset space ~
39526 \begin_layout Subsection
39530 \begin_layout Standard
39536 Graphics are described in section
39537 \begin_inset space ~
39541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39543 reference "sec:Graphics"
39550 \begin_layout Subsection
39554 \begin_layout Standard
39555 Inserts a URL as described in section
39556 \begin_inset space ~
39560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39562 reference "subsec:URLs"
39569 \begin_layout Subsection
39573 \begin_layout Standard
39574 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39575 \begin_inset space ~
39579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39581 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39588 \begin_layout Subsection
39592 \begin_layout Standard
39593 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39594 \begin_inset space ~
39598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39600 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39607 \begin_layout Subsection
39611 \begin_layout Standard
39612 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39613 \begin_inset space ~
39617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39619 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39626 \begin_layout Subsection
39629 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
39632 \begin_layout Standard
39633 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
39634 environments of the same type.
39636 \begin_inset space ~
39640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39642 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
39646 for an explanation.
39649 \begin_layout Subsection
39653 \begin_layout Standard
39654 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39655 title or caption of a float.
39656 Inserts a short title as described in section
39657 \begin_inset space ~
39661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39663 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39670 \begin_layout Subsection
39675 \begin_layout Standard
39676 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39677 Code box as described in section
39678 \begin_inset space ~
39682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39684 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39691 \begin_layout Subsection
39693 \begin_inset Index idx
39696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39705 \begin_layout Standard
39706 Inserts a program listings box.
39707 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39709 Program Code Listings
39714 \begin_inset space ~
39722 \begin_layout Subsection
39726 \begin_layout Standard
39727 Inserts the actual date.
39728 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39733 \begin_layout Subsection
39737 \begin_layout Standard
39738 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39739 \begin_inset space ~
39743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39745 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39752 \begin_layout Section
39754 \begin_inset Index idx
39757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39766 \begin_layout Standard
39767 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39768 \begin_inset space ~
39771 of the current document.
39772 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39775 \begin_layout Subsection
39779 \begin_layout Standard
39780 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39781 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39782 to jump, for example, between section
39783 \begin_inset space ~
39787 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39788 \begin_inset space ~
39791 2.5 and use the submenu
39794 \begin_inset space ~
39798 \begin_inset space ~
39805 \begin_inset space ~
39811 \begin_inset space ~
39815 \begin_inset space ~
39821 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39825 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39831 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39834 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39837 \begin_layout Standard
39838 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39842 \begin_inset space ~
39847 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39850 \begin_inset space ~
39855 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39858 \begin_layout Subsection
39859 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39862 \begin_layout Standard
39863 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39867 \begin_layout Subsection
39871 \begin_layout Standard
39872 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39873 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39874 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39878 \begin_inset space ~
39882 \begin_inset space ~
39890 \begin_layout Subsection
39894 \begin_layout Standard
39895 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39898 The \SpecialChar LyX
39899 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
39901 \begin_inset space ~
39909 \begin_inset space ~
39914 manual for a detailed description.
39917 \begin_layout Section
39919 \begin_inset Index idx
39922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39931 \begin_layout Subsection
39935 \begin_layout Standard
39936 Change Tracking is described in section
39937 \begin_inset space ~
39941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39943 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39950 \begin_layout Subsection
39958 \begin_layout Standard
39959 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
39960 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
39961 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39963 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
39964 to the clipboard or update the view.
39965 \begin_inset Newline newline
39968 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39972 \begin_layout Standard
39975 Open Containing Directory
39977 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
39978 's temporary folder for the document.
39979 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
39980 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
39981 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
39982 For example some journals require to send the
39986 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39990 \begin_layout Subsection
39991 Start Appendix Here
39994 \begin_layout Standard
39995 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
39996 as described in section
39997 \begin_inset space ~
40001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40003 reference "sec:Appendices"
40010 \begin_layout Subsection
40012 \begin_inset space ~
40018 \begin_layout Standard
40019 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
40020 default output format for the document (menu
40022 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40023 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40024 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40026 \begin_inset space ~
40030 \begin_inset space ~
40036 \begin_inset space ~
40040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40042 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40046 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
40049 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40050 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40052 \begin_inset space ~
40055 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40057 \begin_inset space ~
40060 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40062 \begin_inset space ~
40066 \begin_inset space ~
40072 \begin_inset space ~
40076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40078 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40082 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
40083 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40085 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40086 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40088 \begin_inset space ~
40091 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40093 \begin_inset space ~
40096 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40100 \begin_inset space ~
40104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40106 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40111 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40112 when it is first configured.
40113 The default output format is
40116 \begin_inset space ~
40124 \begin_layout Subsection
40125 View (Other Formats)
40128 \begin_layout Standard
40129 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
40130 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
40131 actual document with an external program.
40132 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
40133 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40134 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
40136 All possible formats are listed in section
40137 \begin_inset space ~
40141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40143 reference "subsec:Export"
40148 You should at least see the menu entry
40153 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40155 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40157 \begin_inset space ~
40161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40163 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40168 \begin_inset Index idx
40171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40172 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40181 \begin_layout Standard
40182 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
40183 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40185 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40186 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40188 \begin_inset space ~
40191 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40193 \begin_inset space ~
40196 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40200 \begin_inset space ~
40204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40206 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40211 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40212 when it is first configured.
40215 \begin_layout Subsection
40217 \begin_inset space ~
40223 \begin_layout Standard
40224 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
40225 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40228 \begin_layout Subsection
40229 Update (Other Formats)
40232 \begin_layout Standard
40233 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40234 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40237 \begin_layout Subsection
40238 View Master Document
40241 \begin_layout Standard
40242 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40258 \begin_inset space ~
40263 manual for more information on this topic).
40264 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40265 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40269 \begin_inset space ~
40273 \begin_inset space ~
40278 generates the output of the whole book, while
40282 will just output the chapter alone.
40285 \begin_layout Standard
40286 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40287 in the document settings (menu
40289 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40290 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40291 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40293 \begin_inset space ~
40297 \begin_inset space ~
40303 \begin_inset space ~
40307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40309 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40313 ) or in the preferences (menu
40315 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40316 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40318 \begin_inset space ~
40321 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40323 \begin_inset space ~
40326 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40328 \begin_inset space ~
40332 \begin_inset space ~
40338 \begin_inset space ~
40342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40344 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40351 \begin_layout Subsection
40352 Update Master Document
40355 \begin_layout Standard
40356 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40372 \begin_inset space ~
40377 manual for more information on this topic).
40378 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40379 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40382 \begin_layout Standard
40383 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40384 in the document settings (menu
40386 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40387 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40388 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40390 \begin_inset space ~
40394 \begin_inset space ~
40400 \begin_inset space ~
40404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40406 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40410 ) or in the preferences (menu
40412 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40413 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40415 \begin_inset space ~
40418 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40420 \begin_inset space ~
40423 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40425 \begin_inset space ~
40429 \begin_inset space ~
40435 \begin_inset space ~
40439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40441 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40448 \begin_layout Subsection
40450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40452 name "subsec:Compressed"
40459 \begin_layout Standard
40460 Un/compresses the current document.
40461 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40462 compression (see the
40464 Additional Features
40466 manual for details).
40469 \begin_layout Subsection
40473 \begin_layout Standard
40474 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40477 \begin_layout Subsection
40481 \begin_layout Standard
40482 The document settings are described in appendix
40483 \begin_inset space ~
40487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40489 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40496 \begin_layout Section
40498 \begin_inset Index idx
40501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40510 \begin_layout Subsection
40514 \begin_layout Standard
40515 Spell checking is explained in section
40516 \begin_inset space ~
40520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40522 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40529 \begin_layout Subsection
40533 \begin_layout Standard
40534 The thesaurus is described in section
40535 \begin_inset space ~
40539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40541 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40548 \begin_layout Subsection
40550 \begin_inset Index idx
40553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40560 \begin_inset Index idx
40563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40572 \begin_layout Standard
40573 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40574 the highlighted document part.
40577 \begin_layout Subsection
40583 \begin_inset Index idx
40586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40587 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40596 \begin_layout Standard
40597 Generates with the help of the program
40599 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40602 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40603 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40604 This feature is not available on Windows.
40607 \begin_layout Subsection
40613 \begin_inset Index idx
40616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40626 \begin_layout Standard
40627 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40632 \begin_inset space ~
40637 to see the full filename paths.
40640 \begin_layout Subsection
40642 \begin_inset Index idx
40645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40654 \begin_layout Standard
40655 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40656 files as described in section
40657 \begin_inset space ~
40661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40663 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40670 \begin_layout Subsection
40672 \begin_inset Index idx
40675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40688 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40706 \begin_inset Index idx
40709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40710 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40719 \begin_layout Standard
40720 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40721 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40722 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40723 -packages and programs it needs; see
40725 \begin_inset space ~
40729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40731 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40738 \begin_layout Subsection
40742 \begin_layout Standard
40747 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40748 \begin_inset space ~
40752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40754 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40761 \begin_layout Section
40763 \begin_inset Index idx
40766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40775 \begin_layout Standard
40776 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40777 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40779 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40783 \begin_layout Standard
40787 \begin_inset space ~
40792 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40793 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40794 packages and classes found
40795 by \SpecialChar LyX
40797 \begin_inset space ~
40801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40803 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40810 \begin_layout Standard
40814 \begin_inset space ~
40819 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40824 \begin_layout Section
40826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40828 name "sec:Toolbars"
40835 \begin_layout Standard
40836 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40837 \begin_inset space ~
40841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40843 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40850 \begin_layout Standard
40851 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40852 This is described in the
40854 Additional Features
40859 \begin_layout Subsection
40861 \begin_inset Index idx
40864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40873 \begin_layout Standard
40874 \begin_inset Graphics
40875 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40883 \begin_layout Standard
40884 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40890 \begin_layout Standard
40891 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40908 \begin_inset Note Note
40911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40912 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
40917 manual for more information.
40925 \begin_layout Standard
40926 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40932 \begin_layout Standard
40933 \begin_inset Tabular
40934 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
40935 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40936 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40937 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40943 \begin_inset Graphics
40944 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
40954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40958 pull-down box for the environments
40971 \begin_layout Standard
40972 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
40978 \begin_layout Standard
40980 \begin_inset Tabular
40981 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
40982 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40983 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40984 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40985 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41008 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41015 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41038 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41045 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41068 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41075 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41084 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41098 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41105 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41114 arg "spelling-continuously"
41122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41126 Spellcheck continuously
41132 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41155 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41162 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41185 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41192 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41215 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41222 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41245 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41252 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41275 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41282 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41291 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41305 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41311 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41315 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41324 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41331 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41345 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41347 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41351 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41355 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41364 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41373 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41387 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41388 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41395 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41416 Emphasize text, function of the
41418 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41420 \begin_inset space ~
41423 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41432 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41453 Set text to noun style, function of the
41455 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41457 \begin_inset space ~
41460 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41469 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41478 arg "textstyle-apply"
41486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41490 Format text using the current settings in the
41492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41494 \begin_inset space ~
41497 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41506 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41529 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41530 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41532 \begin_inset space ~
41541 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41550 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41564 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41571 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41578 arg "tabular-insert"
41586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41592 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41599 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41608 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41620 Toggle outline window on/off,
41622 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41629 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41638 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41650 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41656 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41665 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41677 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41690 \begin_layout Subsection
41692 \begin_inset Index idx
41695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41704 \begin_layout Standard
41705 \begin_inset Graphics
41706 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41714 \begin_layout Standard
41715 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41721 \begin_layout Standard
41722 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41726 \begin_layout Standard
41727 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41733 \begin_layout Standard
41734 \begin_inset Tabular
41735 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41736 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41737 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41738 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41739 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41766 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41775 arg "layout Enumerate"
41783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41793 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41802 arg "layout Itemize"
41810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41820 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41847 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41856 arg "layout Description"
41864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41874 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41883 arg "depth-increment"
41891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41897 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41899 \begin_inset space ~
41903 \begin_inset space ~
41912 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41921 arg "depth-decrement"
41929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41935 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41937 \begin_inset space ~
41941 \begin_inset space ~
41950 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41959 arg "float-insert figure"
41967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41973 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41974 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41981 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41990 arg "float-insert table"
41998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42004 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42005 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42012 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42035 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42042 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42051 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
42059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42065 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42072 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42081 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
42089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42095 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42102 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42125 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42127 \begin_inset space ~
42136 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42145 arg "nomencl-insert"
42153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42159 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42161 \begin_inset space ~
42170 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42179 arg "footnote-insert"
42187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42193 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42200 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42209 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42223 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42225 \begin_inset space ~
42234 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42257 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42258 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42260 \begin_inset space ~
42269 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42278 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42292 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42299 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42322 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42329 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42352 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42354 \begin_inset space ~
42363 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42372 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42386 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42387 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42394 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42403 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42417 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42418 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42420 \begin_inset space ~
42429 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42438 arg "dialog-show character"
42446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42452 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42454 \begin_inset space ~
42457 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42464 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42473 arg "layout-paragraph"
42481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42487 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42489 \begin_inset space ~
42498 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42507 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42521 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42535 \begin_layout Subsection
42536 View/Update Toolbar
42537 \begin_inset Index idx
42540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42541 Toolbar ! View / Update
42549 \begin_layout Standard
42550 \begin_inset Graphics
42551 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42558 \begin_layout Standard
42559 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42565 \begin_layout Standard
42566 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42570 \begin_layout Standard
42571 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42577 \begin_layout Standard
42578 \begin_inset Tabular
42579 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42580 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42581 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42582 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42583 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42606 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42613 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42622 arg "buffer-update"
42630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42636 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42643 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42652 arg "master-buffer-view"
42660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42666 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42668 \begin_inset space ~
42677 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42686 arg "master-buffer-update"
42694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42700 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42702 \begin_inset space ~
42706 \begin_inset space ~
42715 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42724 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42738 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42739 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42740 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42741 Synchronize with Output
42747 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42770 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42771 View (Other Formats)
42777 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42784 arg "update-others"
42792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42798 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42799 Update (Other Formats)
42812 \begin_layout Standard
42813 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42817 \begin_layout Subsection
42821 \begin_layout Standard
42822 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42823 \begin_inset space ~
42827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42829 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42833 , the table toolbar
42834 \begin_inset Index idx
42837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42846 \begin_inset space ~
42851 manual and the math macro toolbar
42852 \begin_inset Index idx
42855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42868 \begin_layout Chapter
42869 The Document Settings
42870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42872 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42877 \begin_inset Index idx
42880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42881 Document ! Settings
42889 \begin_layout Standard
42893 \begin_inset space ~
42898 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42899 is called with the menu
42901 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42905 You can save your document settings as default with the
42907 Save as Document Defaults
42909 button in any dialog.
42910 This will create a template named
42914 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
42915 when you create a new document without
42919 \begin_layout Standard
42924 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
42925 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
42928 \begin_layout Standard
42929 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
42930 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
42931 to find the one you are looking for.
42932 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
42933 the submenus of the dialog.
42935 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42939 \begin_inset space \space{}
42943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42950 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
42951 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
42952 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
42955 \begin_layout Section
42959 \begin_layout Standard
42960 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
42962 Document classes are described in section
42963 \begin_inset space ~
42967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42969 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
42977 \begin_layout Standard
42981 \begin_inset space ~
42986 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
42991 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
42992 as a layout for a document class.
42993 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
42995 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
43004 \begin_layout Standard
43005 Some classes use special class options by default.
43006 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
43010 and you can decide to use them or not.
43011 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
43012 recommended you leave them untouched.
43017 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43018 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
43023 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43025 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
43030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43031 When you want to use one of the following drivers
43032 \begin_inset Newline newline
43037 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
43040 \begin_inset Newline newline
43043 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43044 distribution, see section
43049 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43051 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
43064 \begin_layout Standard
43069 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
43070 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
43071 in the background if the child document
43072 is opened without its master.
43073 This way child documents are always compilable.
43074 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
43081 \begin_inset space ~
43089 \begin_layout Standard
43090 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43101 \begin_inset Index idx
43104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43106 packages ! prettyref
43112 \begin_inset Index idx
43115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43117 packages ! refstyle
43122 for cross-references, see section
43123 \begin_inset space ~
43127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43129 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43136 \begin_layout Section
43140 \begin_layout Standard
43141 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
43142 Please refer to the section
43145 \begin_inset space ~
43153 \begin_inset space ~
43158 manual for details.
43161 \begin_layout Section
43165 \begin_layout Standard
43166 Modules are explained in section
43167 \begin_inset space ~
43171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43173 reference "subsec:Modules"
43180 \begin_layout Section
43184 \begin_layout Standard
43186 \begin_inset space ~
43190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43192 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
43199 \begin_layout Section
43203 \begin_layout Standard
43204 The document font settings are described in section
43205 \begin_inset space ~
43209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43211 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43218 \begin_layout Section
43222 \begin_layout Standard
43223 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43235 \begin_inset space ~
43240 and whether it should be a
43243 \begin_inset space ~
43248 can also be specified here.
43251 \begin_layout Standard
43252 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43253 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43254 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43256 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43259 \begin_layout Standard
43262 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43265 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43266 justifies the text on screen.
43267 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43271 \begin_layout Section
43275 \begin_layout Standard
43276 This dialog is described in sections
43277 \begin_inset space ~
43281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43283 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43290 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43297 \begin_layout Section
43301 \begin_layout Standard
43302 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43303 \begin_inset space ~
43307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43309 reference "subsec:Margins"
43316 \begin_layout Section
43318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43320 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43325 \begin_inset Index idx
43328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43329 Language ! Encoding
43337 \begin_layout Standard
43338 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43339 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43340 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43342 is always encoded in utf8).
43343 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43344 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43345 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43346 -command is not known for
43347 a particular character).
43350 \begin_layout Standard
43351 If you use the option
43356 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43357 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43358 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43360 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43361 exactly one encoding.
43362 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43365 \begin_layout Standard
43367 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43368 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43369 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43370 installation supports Unicode), choose
43371 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43372 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43373 is quite incomplete, so
43374 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43379 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43380 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43381 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43382 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43383 -commands is not used, because all
43384 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43385 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43386 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43387 , two new alternative engines
43388 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43390 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43392 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43395 \begin_inset space ~
43403 \begin_inset space ~
43411 \begin_inset space ~
43417 \begin_inset space ~
43421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43423 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43428 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43432 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43435 \begin_layout Standard
43439 \begin_inset space ~
43444 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43445 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43455 The possible settings are:
43458 \begin_layout Description
43459 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43461 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43462 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43466 \begin_inset space ~
43470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43472 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43479 \begin_layout Description
43480 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43481 format you will use.
43482 In many cases this will be
43487 \begin_inset Index idx
43490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43498 If the newer package
43503 \begin_inset Index idx
43506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43508 packages ! polyglossia
43513 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43514 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43515 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43517 this package will be used instead of
43524 \begin_layout Description
43526 \begin_inset space ~
43537 would be more appropriate.
43540 \begin_layout Description
43541 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43542 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43546 (for German texts), type in
43549 \begin_inset Newline newline
43554 usepackage{ngerman}
43557 \begin_layout Description
43558 None will not use a language package.
43559 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43562 \begin_layout Standard
43563 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43566 \begin_layout Description
43568 \begin_inset space ~
43572 \begin_inset space ~
43576 \begin_inset space ~
43583 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43589 \begin_inset Index idx
43592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43594 packages ! inputenc
43600 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43601 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43602 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43606 \begin_layout Description
43607 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43609 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43610 commands, which may result in a big
43611 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43612 -commands are needed.
43615 \begin_layout Description
43617 \begin_inset space ~
43621 \begin_inset space ~
43624 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43627 \begin_layout Description
43629 \begin_inset space ~
43633 \begin_inset space ~
43636 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43639 \begin_layout Description
43641 \begin_inset space ~
43644 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43647 \begin_layout Description
43649 \begin_inset space ~
43653 \begin_inset space ~
43656 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43657 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43660 \begin_layout Description
43662 \begin_inset space ~
43666 \begin_inset space ~
43669 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43673 \begin_layout Description
43675 \begin_inset space ~
43679 \begin_inset space ~
43682 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43683 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43686 \begin_layout Description
43688 \begin_inset space ~
43692 \begin_inset space ~
43696 \begin_inset space ~
43699 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43700 \begin_inset space ~
43706 \begin_layout Description
43708 \begin_inset space ~
43712 \begin_inset space ~
43716 \begin_inset space ~
43719 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43720 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43723 \begin_layout Description
43725 \begin_inset space ~
43729 \begin_inset space ~
43732 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43733 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43734 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43735 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43736 \begin_inset space ~
43740 \begin_inset space ~
43746 \begin_layout Description
43748 \begin_inset space ~
43752 \begin_inset space ~
43755 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43756 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43757 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43759 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43760 \begin_inset space ~
43764 \begin_inset space ~
43770 \begin_layout Description
43772 \begin_inset space ~
43776 \begin_inset space ~
43779 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43782 \begin_layout Description
43784 \begin_inset space ~
43788 \begin_inset space ~
43791 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43794 \begin_layout Description
43796 \begin_inset space ~
43800 \begin_inset space ~
43803 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43806 \begin_layout Description
43808 \begin_inset space ~
43811 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43814 \begin_layout Description
43816 \begin_inset space ~
43819 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43822 \begin_layout Description
43824 \begin_inset space ~
43828 \begin_inset space ~
43831 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43834 \begin_layout Description
43836 \begin_inset space ~
43840 \begin_inset space ~
43846 \begin_layout Description
43848 \begin_inset space ~
43852 \begin_inset space ~
43855 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43858 \begin_layout Description
43860 \begin_inset space ~
43864 \begin_inset space ~
43870 \begin_layout Description
43872 \begin_inset space ~
43876 \begin_inset space ~
43879 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43885 \begin_inset Index idx
43888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43895 , when using this, set the document language to
43900 \begin_layout Description
43902 \begin_inset space ~
43906 \begin_inset space ~
43909 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43914 , when using this, set the document language to
43917 \begin_inset space ~
43923 \begin_layout Description
43925 \begin_inset space ~
43929 \begin_inset space ~
43932 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43938 \begin_inset Index idx
43941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43943 packages ! japanese
43948 , when using this, set the document language to
43953 \begin_layout Description
43955 \begin_inset space ~
43959 \begin_inset space ~
43962 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43967 , when using this, set the document language to
43972 \begin_layout Description
43974 \begin_inset space ~
43978 \begin_inset space ~
43981 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43986 , when using this, set the document language to
43991 \begin_layout Description
43993 \begin_inset space ~
43996 (EUC-KR) for Korean
43999 \begin_layout Description
44001 \begin_inset space ~
44005 \begin_inset space ~
44009 \begin_inset space ~
44012 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
44015 \begin_layout Description
44017 \begin_inset space ~
44021 \begin_inset space ~
44025 \begin_inset space ~
44028 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
44029 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
44030 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
44033 \begin_layout Description
44035 \begin_inset space ~
44039 \begin_inset space ~
44045 \begin_layout Description
44047 \begin_inset space ~
44051 \begin_inset space ~
44054 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
44055 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
44058 \begin_layout Description
44060 \begin_inset space ~
44064 \begin_inset space ~
44067 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44073 \begin_inset Index idx
44076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44083 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
44086 \begin_layout Description
44088 \begin_inset space ~
44096 \begin_inset space ~
44099 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
44106 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44109 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44116 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44117 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44119 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
44122 \begin_layout Description
44124 \begin_inset space ~
44128 \begin_inset space ~
44131 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44137 \begin_inset Index idx
44140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44147 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
44150 \begin_layout Description
44152 \begin_inset space ~
44155 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44161 \begin_inset Index idx
44164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44166 packages ! inputenc
44172 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
44176 \begin_layout Description
44178 \begin_inset space ~
44182 \begin_inset space ~
44186 \begin_inset space ~
44189 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
44190 \begin_inset space ~
44196 \begin_layout Description
44198 \begin_inset space ~
44202 \begin_inset space ~
44206 \begin_inset space ~
44209 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44210 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44211 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44215 \begin_layout Description
44217 \begin_inset space ~
44221 \begin_inset space ~
44225 \begin_inset space ~
44228 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44229 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44232 \begin_layout Section
44234 \begin_inset Index idx
44237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44244 \begin_inset Index idx
44247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44254 \begin_inset Index idx
44257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44258 Color ! Shaded boxes
44264 \begin_inset Index idx
44267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44268 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44276 \begin_layout Standard
44277 Here you can alter the font color for the
44281 (default: black), for
44284 \begin_inset space ~
44289 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44293 (default: white) and for
44296 \begin_inset space ~
44306 sets the color back to the default.
44309 \begin_layout Standard
44310 Clicking any button showing
44318 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44319 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44320 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44321 later more quickly.
44324 \begin_layout Standard
44325 Note, if you change the
44328 \begin_inset space ~
44333 font color and use the option
44336 \begin_inset space ~
44341 in the document settings under
44344 \begin_inset space ~
44349 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44350 \begin_inset space ~
44354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44356 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44363 \begin_layout Standard
44364 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44370 \begin_layout Standard
44374 \begin_inset space ~
44383 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44386 \begin_inset space ~
44389 Code after a forced page break:
44392 \begin_layout Itemize
44393 For the page color:
44394 \begin_inset Newline newline
44401 pagecolor{color name}
44404 \begin_layout Itemize
44405 For the text color:
44406 \begin_inset Newline newline
44416 \begin_layout Standard
44417 You are restricted to one of
44453 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44460 \begin_inset space ~
44466 \begin_inset Newline newline
44469 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44470 names to refer to them:
44473 \begin_layout Itemize
44479 \begin_inset Newline newline
44484 page_backgroundcolor
44487 \begin_layout Itemize
44491 \begin_inset space ~
44497 \begin_inset Newline newline
44505 \begin_layout Itemize
44509 \begin_inset space ~
44515 \begin_inset Newline newline
44523 \begin_layout Itemize
44527 \begin_inset space ~
44533 \begin_inset Newline newline
44541 \begin_layout Standard
44542 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44545 \begin_inset space ~
44553 \begin_inset space ~
44561 \begin_layout Section
44565 \begin_layout Standard
44566 Here you can adjust the
44570 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44574 as described in section
44575 \begin_inset space ~
44579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44581 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44588 \begin_layout Section
44592 \begin_layout Standard
44593 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44599 \begin_inset Index idx
44602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44604 packages ! biblatex
44614 \begin_inset Index idx
44617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44629 \begin_inset Index idx
44632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44640 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44643 Sectioned bibliography
44645 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44651 \begin_inset Index idx
44654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44656 packages ! bibtopic
44666 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
44667 Finally, you can select a document-specific
44671 for the generation of the bibliography.
44672 For a further description of these possibilities see section
44673 \begin_inset space ~
44677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44679 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44686 \begin_layout Section
44690 \begin_layout Standard
44691 Here you can define the
44695 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44697 \begin_inset space ~
44701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44703 reference "sec:Index"
44710 \begin_layout Section
44714 \begin_layout Standard
44715 The PDF properties are explained in section
44716 \begin_inset space ~
44720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44722 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44729 \begin_layout Section
44733 \begin_layout Standard
44734 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44735 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44741 \begin_inset Index idx
44744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44756 \begin_inset Index idx
44759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44771 \begin_inset Index idx
44774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44786 \begin_inset Index idx
44789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44801 \begin_inset Index idx
44804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44806 packages ! mathdots
44816 \begin_inset Index idx
44819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44821 packages ! mathtools
44831 \begin_inset Index idx
44834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44846 \begin_inset Index idx
44849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44851 packages ! stackrel
44861 \begin_inset Index idx
44864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44866 packages ! stmaryrd
44876 \begin_inset Index idx
44879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44881 packages ! undertilde
44886 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
44889 \begin_layout Description
44890 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44891 -errors in formulas,
44892 ensure that you have this enabled.
44895 \begin_layout Description
44896 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
44897 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44898 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
44902 \begin_layout Description
44903 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
44906 \begin_inset space ~
44918 \begin_layout Description
44919 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
44922 \begin_inset space ~
44934 \begin_layout Description
44935 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
44946 \begin_layout Description
44947 mathtools is used for the math commands
44983 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
44990 \begin_layout Description
44991 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
44993 Chemical Symbols and Equations
45002 \begin_layout Description
45003 stackrel is used for the math command
45020 \begin_layout Description
45021 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
45024 \begin_layout Description
45025 undertilde is used for the math command
45033 Accents for one Character
45042 \begin_layout Section
45046 \begin_layout Standard
45047 The float placement options are described in the section
45050 \begin_inset space ~
45058 \begin_inset space ~
45066 \begin_layout Section
45070 \begin_layout Standard
45071 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
45073 Program Code Listings
45078 \begin_inset space ~
45086 \begin_layout Section
45090 \begin_layout Standard
45091 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
45099 set to be used and set the
45104 The itemize environment is described in section
45105 \begin_inset space ~
45109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45111 reference "sec:Itemize"
45118 \begin_layout Standard
45119 You can furthermore specify a
45122 \begin_inset space ~
45127 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45128 command of the desired character.
45129 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
45136 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
45138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45142 \begin_inset space \space{}
45146 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
45156 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
45157 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
45160 \begin_layout Standard
45161 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45169 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45170 -packages in the preamble (menu
45173 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45174 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45177 \begin_inset space ~
45183 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
45187 usepackage{textcomp}
45190 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
45194 usepackage{amssymb}
45204 \begin_layout Section
45208 \begin_layout Standard
45209 Branches are described in section
45210 \begin_inset space ~
45214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45216 reference "sec:Branches"
45223 \begin_layout Section
45225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45227 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45234 \begin_layout Standard
45235 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45238 \begin_layout Description
45240 \begin_inset space ~
45244 \begin_inset space ~
45247 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45267 View Master Document
45268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45275 Update Master Document
45276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45283 menu or the toolbar.
45284 The default is set in
45286 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45287 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45289 \begin_inset space ~
45292 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45296 \begin_inset space ~
45300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45302 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45309 \begin_layout Description
45311 \begin_inset space ~
45315 \begin_inset space ~
45318 Output settings for the menu
45320 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45322 \begin_inset space ~
45328 For a detailed description see section
45330 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45335 \begin_inset space ~
45343 \begin_layout Description
45345 \begin_inset space ~
45349 \begin_inset space ~
45352 Options offers settings for the export format
45360 \begin_inset space ~
45365 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45366 \begin_inset space ~
45369 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45373 \begin_inset space ~
45378 settings are described in detail in section
45380 Math Output in XHTML
45385 \begin_inset space ~
45394 \begin_inset space ~
45398 \begin_inset space ~
45403 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45406 \begin_layout Description
45408 \begin_inset space ~
45413 Save transient properties
45415 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45416 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45417 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45421 \begin_layout Itemize
45422 the activation of change tracking
45425 \begin_layout Itemize
45426 the output of tracked changes
45429 \begin_layout Itemize
45430 the recording of the document directory path.
45433 \begin_layout Standard
45434 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45435 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45439 \begin_layout Section
45447 \begin_layout Standard
45448 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45450 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45452 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45454 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45458 \begin_layout Standard
45459 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45460 -syntax is given in section
45461 \begin_inset space ~
45465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45467 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45474 \begin_layout Chapter
45480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45482 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45487 \begin_inset Index idx
45490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45499 \begin_layout Standard
45500 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45502 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45506 It has the following submenus.
45509 \begin_layout Section
45513 \begin_layout Subsection
45517 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45518 User Interface File
45519 \begin_inset Index idx
45522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45523 Customization ! of toolbars
45529 \begin_inset Index idx
45532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45533 Customization ! of menus
45541 \begin_layout Standard
45542 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45543 interface (ui) file.
45544 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45552 \begin_layout Description
45557 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45560 \begin_layout Description
45567 the menu entries in popup context menus
45570 \begin_layout Description
45575 specifies the toolbar buttons
45578 \begin_layout Standard
45579 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45580 and edit the entries.
45583 \begin_layout Standard
45584 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45596 entries must be finished with an explicit
45621 and in the case of the
45622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45634 The syntax for the entries is:
45637 \begin_layout Standard
45638 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45667 \begin_layout Standard
45669 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45672 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45673 -functions are listed in the menu
45675 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45677 \begin_inset space ~
45685 \begin_layout Standard
45686 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45692 \begin_layout Standard
45693 For example, assuming you use the menu
45695 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45698 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45702 \begin_layout Standard
45703 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45727 \begin_layout Standard
45729 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45744 to have the sixth bookmark.
45747 \begin_layout Standard
45751 \begin_inset space ~
45756 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45757 's toolbar buttons.
45758 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45759 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45762 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45770 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45774 \begin_layout Standard
45777 Enable tool tips in main work area
45779 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45783 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45787 \begin_layout Standard
45792 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45793 should display in the menu
45795 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45797 \begin_inset space ~
45805 \begin_layout Subsection
45809 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45813 \begin_layout Standard
45816 Restore window layouts and geometries
45819 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45820 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45824 \begin_layout Standard
45827 Restore cursor positions
45829 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45833 \begin_layout Standard
45836 Load opened files from last session
45838 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45842 \begin_layout Standard
45845 Clear all session information
45847 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45848 sessions (cursor positions, names
45849 of last opened documents, etc.).
45852 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45856 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45861 \begin_inset Index idx
45864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45873 \begin_layout Standard
45876 Backup original documents when saving
45878 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45879 it was saved the last time.
45880 It is stored in the
45883 \begin_inset space ~
45889 \begin_inset space ~
45893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45895 reference "sec:Paths"
45899 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
45902 \begin_inset space ~
45908 The backup file has the file extension
45909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45923 \begin_layout Standard
45926 Backup documents, every
45928 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
45931 \begin_layout Standard
45934 Save documents compressed by default
45936 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
45937 \begin_inset space ~
45941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45943 reference "subsec:Compressed"
45948 This applies to newly created documents only.
45949 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
45952 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45953 Windows & work area
45956 \begin_layout Standard
45959 Open documents in tabs
45961 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
45965 \begin_layout Standard
45970 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
45975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45977 \begin_inset space ~
45981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45983 reference "sec:Paths"
45987 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
45994 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
45995 documents will be opened in the same running instance
45996 of \SpecialChar LyX
45998 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
45999 instance is created for each file.
46002 \begin_layout Standard
46005 Single close-tab button
46007 is checked, there will only be one close button (
46017 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
46018 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
46019 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
46023 \begin_layout Standard
46024 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46032 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
46033 before the change takes effect.
46041 \begin_layout Standard
46046 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
46048 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
46050 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
46054 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
46055 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
46056 and only want to close the view in once instance.
46059 \begin_layout Subsection
46061 \begin_inset Index idx
46064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46071 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46073 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
46080 \begin_layout Standard
46081 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
46085 \begin_layout Standard
46086 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46094 This section only deals with the fonts
46098 the \SpecialChar LyX
46100 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
46103 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46104 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46115 \begin_layout Standard
46116 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46133 (depends on the system) as its
46136 \begin_inset space ~
46152 \begin_layout Standard
46153 You can change the font size with the
46160 \begin_layout Standard
46165 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
46167 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46170 points have the size of 1
46171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46175 \begin_inset space ~
46179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46181 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
46186 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
46187 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46191 The sizes are explained in detail in section
46192 \begin_inset space ~
46196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46198 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
46205 \begin_layout Standard
46208 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
46210 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
46211 needs to redraw the screen less often.
46212 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
46213 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
46214 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
46216 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
46217 \begin_inset space ~
46223 \begin_layout Subsection
46225 \begin_inset Index idx
46228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46229 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46236 \begin_inset Index idx
46239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46248 \begin_layout Standard
46249 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46250 by choosing an item in the
46251 list and selecting the
46258 \begin_layout Standard
46259 By checking the option
46263 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46266 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46267 \begin_inset space ~
46271 \begin_inset space ~
46276 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46279 \begin_layout Subsection
46281 \begin_inset Index idx
46284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46293 \begin_layout Standard
46294 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46298 \begin_layout Standard
46303 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46304 This feature is described in section
46305 \begin_inset space ~
46309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46311 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46318 \begin_layout Standard
46319 Checking the option
46322 \begin_inset space ~
46326 \begin_inset space ~
46330 \begin_inset space ~
46335 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46338 \begin_layout Section
46340 \begin_inset Index idx
46343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46352 \begin_layout Subsection
46356 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46360 \begin_layout Standard
46363 Cursor follows scrollbar
46365 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46369 \begin_layout Standard
46370 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46371 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46372 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46375 \begin_layout Standard
46378 Scroll below end of document
46380 is self-explanatory.
46383 \begin_layout Standard
46384 In \SpecialChar LyX
46385 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46392 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46394 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46395 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46398 \begin_layout Standard
46401 Sort environments alphabetically
46403 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46406 \begin_layout Standard
46409 Group environments by their category
46411 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46414 \begin_layout Standard
46419 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46430 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46434 \begin_layout Standard
46435 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46440 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46441 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46445 \begin_layout Subsection
46447 \begin_inset Index idx
46450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46457 \begin_inset Index idx
46460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46461 Settings ! Shortcuts
46469 \begin_layout Standard
46474 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46476 Several binding files are available, among them:
46479 \begin_layout Description
46480 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46483 \begin_layout Description
46484 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46496 \begin_layout Description
46497 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46500 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46508 \begin_layout Standard
46509 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46514 , and binding files for special languages.
46515 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46516 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46520 \begin_inset space \space{}
46524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46532 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46533 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46534 will try to use the appropriate binding
46538 \begin_layout Standard
46539 Some binding files, like
46543 , only have a limited scope.
46544 When looking at the end of the file
46548 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46551 \begin_layout Standard
46555 \begin_inset space ~
46559 \begin_inset space ~
46564 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46565 in the selected key binding file.
46568 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46570 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46572 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46577 \begin_inset Index idx
46580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46581 Key Bindings ! Editing
46589 \begin_layout Standard
46590 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
46591 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46592 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46593 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46596 Show key-bindings containing
46599 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46600 Insert there for example as keyword
46601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46608 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46609 functions that contain
46610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46618 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46619 All \SpecialChar LyX
46620 functions are also listed in the file
46625 that you will find in the
46632 \begin_layout Standard
46633 For example, to add the shortcut
46641 , select the function and press the
46646 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46647 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46650 \begin_layout Standard
46651 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46652 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46654 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46655 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46657 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46662 \begin_layout Standard
46663 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46666 \begin_layout Standard
46667 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46669 The syntax of the entries is:
46672 \begin_layout Standard
46678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46697 \begin_layout Standard
46698 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
46699 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
46700 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46727 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
46728 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
46729 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
46730 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
46732 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
46736 , you needed to specify it as
46741 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
46744 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
46747 \begin_layout Subsection
46749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46751 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46756 \begin_inset Index idx
46759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46766 \begin_inset Index idx
46769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46770 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46778 \begin_layout Standard
46779 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46780 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46781 provides keyboard maps.
46782 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46783 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46786 \begin_inset space ~
46790 \begin_inset space ~
46795 and select the keyboard map file named
46802 \begin_layout Standard
46811 keyboard map and, if you use the
46815 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46818 arg "keymap-primary"
46824 arg "keymap-secondary"
46827 respectively or toggle between them with
46830 arg "keymap-toggle"
46836 \begin_layout Standard
46837 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46845 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46854 \begin_layout Standard
46855 You can also specify the mouse
46857 Wheel scrolling speed
46860 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46864 Middle mouse button pasting
46866 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46867 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46870 \begin_layout Standard
46878 \begin_inset space ~
46882 \begin_inset space ~
46887 you can select a key for zooming.
46888 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46891 \begin_layout Subsection
46895 \begin_layout Standard
46896 Input completion is described in section
46897 \begin_inset space ~
46901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46903 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46910 \begin_layout Section
46912 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46919 \begin_inset Index idx
46922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46929 \begin_inset Index idx
46932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46941 \begin_layout Standard
46942 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
46943 are normally determined during
46945 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
46948 \begin_layout Description
46950 \begin_inset space ~
46953 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
46954 's working directory.
46955 It is the default when you
46966 \begin_inset space ~
46974 \begin_layout Description
46976 \begin_inset space ~
46979 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
46981 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46983 \begin_inset space ~
46987 \begin_inset space ~
46995 \begin_layout Description
46997 \begin_inset space ~
47000 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
47006 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47010 \begin_inset Newline newline
47014 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47026 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
47027 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
47035 \begin_layout Description
47037 \begin_inset space ~
47041 \begin_inset Index idx
47044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47050 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
47051 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
47052 \begin_inset space ~
47056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47058 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47066 will be used to save the backups.
47067 \begin_inset Newline newline
47070 Backup files have the ending
47071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47081 \begin_layout Description
47083 \begin_inset space ~
47086 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
47087 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
47089 \begin_inset Newline newline
47096 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47102 You can edit this file with the program
47111 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
47112 in its preferences under
47115 \begin_inset space ~
47121 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
47126 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
47128 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
47129 in your \SpecialChar LyX
47135 and \SpecialChar LyX
47136 need to be running the same time.
47137 \begin_inset Newline newline
47140 The pipe is also used for the
47144 feature, see section
47145 \begin_inset space ~
47149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47151 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47156 \begin_inset Newline newline
47159 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
47160 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
47161 \begin_inset Newline newline
47177 \begin_layout Description
47179 \begin_inset space ~
47182 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
47185 \begin_layout Description
47187 \begin_inset space ~
47190 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
47191 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
47192 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
47195 \begin_layout Description
47197 \begin_inset space ~
47200 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
47206 You only need to specify it if you are using
47210 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
47212 For \SpecialChar LyX
47217 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
47221 \begin_layout Description
47223 \begin_inset space ~
47226 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47227 When \SpecialChar LyX
47228 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47229 to find it on the system.
47230 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47232 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47241 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47242 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47245 \begin_layout Description
47247 \begin_inset space ~
47250 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47251 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47252 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47253 code or in the document
47255 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47257 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47258 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47259 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47260 scanned for the input files.
47261 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47262 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47264 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47265 compilation may fail for some documents.
47268 \begin_layout Section
47272 \begin_layout Standard
47273 Here you can insert your
47282 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47284 \begin_inset space ~
47288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47290 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47294 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47297 \begin_layout Section
47299 \begin_inset Index idx
47302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47303 Language ! Settings
47309 \begin_inset Index idx
47312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47313 Settings ! Language
47321 \begin_layout Subsection
47323 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47325 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47332 \begin_layout Description
47334 \begin_inset space ~
47338 \begin_inset space ~
47341 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47343 You can find its actual translation status here:
47344 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47346 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47354 \begin_layout Description
47356 \begin_inset space ~
47359 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47360 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47361 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47362 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47379 The most widespread language package is
47384 \begin_inset Index idx
47387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47394 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47396 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47397 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47398 come with the alternative
47404 \begin_inset Index idx
47407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47409 packages ! polyglossia
47414 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47415 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47421 The available selections are described in section
47422 \begin_inset space ~
47426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47428 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47435 \begin_layout Description
47437 \begin_inset space ~
47440 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47441 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47442 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47443 An example is the start command
47449 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47451 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47455 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47471 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47476 \begin_layout Description
47478 \begin_inset space ~
47486 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47487 command toggles the package on and off.
47490 \begin_layout Description
47492 \begin_inset space ~
47496 \begin_inset space ~
47499 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47503 \begin_layout Description
47505 \begin_inset space ~
47509 \begin_inset space ~
47512 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47516 \begin_layout Description
47518 \begin_inset space ~
47522 \begin_inset space ~
47525 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47526 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47527 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47529 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47536 \begin_layout Description
47538 \begin_inset space ~
47541 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47543 When this option is not set, the
47546 \begin_inset space ~
47551 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47553 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47556 \begin_inset space ~
47564 \begin_layout Description
47566 \begin_inset space ~
47572 \begin_inset space ~
47578 When it is not set, the
47581 \begin_inset space ~
47586 is set to the end of the document.
47589 \begin_layout Description
47591 \begin_inset space ~
47595 \begin_inset space ~
47598 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47599 language will be underlined in blue.
47602 \begin_layout Description
47604 \begin_inset space ~
47608 \begin_inset space ~
47611 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47612 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47615 \begin_layout Description
47617 \begin_inset space ~
47620 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47621 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47622 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47623 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47626 \begin_layout Subsection
47630 \begin_layout Standard
47631 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47632 \begin_inset space ~
47636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47638 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47645 \begin_layout Section
47649 \begin_layout Subsection
47651 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47653 name "subsec:General-output"
47660 \begin_layout Description
47662 \begin_inset space ~
47665 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47667 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47669 \begin_inset space ~
47675 For a detailed description see section
47677 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47682 \begin_inset space ~
47690 \begin_layout Description
47692 \begin_inset space ~
47695 Options Options for the program
47699 that is used for the export format
47704 \begin_inset space ~
47708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47710 reference "subsec:Export"
47715 Possible options are listed in the
47720 \begin_inset Newline newline
47724 \begin_inset Flex URL
47727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47729 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47739 \begin_layout Description
47741 \begin_inset space ~
47745 \begin_inset space ~
47748 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47751 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47752 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47754 \begin_inset space ~
47760 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47763 \begin_layout Description
47765 \begin_inset space ~
47769 \begin_inset Index idx
47772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47779 \begin_inset Index idx
47782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47783 Settings ! Date format
47788 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47789 \begin_inset Newline newline
47793 \begin_inset Flex URL
47796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47798 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47804 \begin_inset Newline newline
47807 For example the format
47808 \begin_inset Newline newline
47812 \begin_inset Newline newline
47815 prints the date as day/month/year.
47818 \begin_layout Description
47820 \begin_inset space ~
47824 \begin_inset space ~
47827 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47828 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47831 \begin_layout Subsection
47837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47839 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47844 \begin_inset Index idx
47847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47848 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47857 \begin_layout Description
47859 \begin_inset space ~
47867 \begin_inset space ~
47871 \begin_inset space ~
47874 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47879 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47900 are used for Cyrillic.
47901 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47914 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47916 sets up in the background.
47917 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47920 \begin_layout Description
47922 \begin_inset space ~
47926 \begin_inset space ~
47930 \begin_inset space ~
47934 \begin_inset space ~
47937 options They only have an effect when the program
47941 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
47944 \begin_layout Standard
47945 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
47946 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
47947 manuals of the applications.
47950 \begin_layout Description
47952 \begin_inset space ~
47955 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
47956 \begin_inset space ~
47960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47962 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
47969 \begin_layout Description
47971 \begin_inset space ~
47974 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
47975 \begin_inset space ~
47979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47981 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
47988 \begin_layout Description
47990 \begin_inset space ~
47993 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
47994 \begin_inset space ~
47998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48000 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
48007 \begin_layout Description
48013 \begin_inset space ~
48016 command Command for the program
48018 Check\SpecialChar TeX
48021 that is described in the section
48023 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
48028 Additional Features
48033 \begin_layout Standard
48034 There are additionally the following options:
48037 \begin_layout Description
48039 \begin_inset space ~
48043 \begin_inset space ~
48047 \begin_inset space ~
48051 \begin_inset space ~
48056 \begin_inset space ~
48059 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
48060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48077 to separate folders.
48078 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
48080 \begin_inset Index idx
48083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48090 \begin_inset Index idx
48093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48102 \begin_layout Description
48104 \begin_inset space ~
48108 \begin_inset space ~
48112 \begin_inset space ~
48116 \begin_inset space ~
48120 \begin_inset space ~
48124 \begin_inset space ~
48127 changes Removes all manually set
48133 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48134 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48136 \begin_inset space ~
48141 dialog when changing the document class.
48144 \begin_layout Section
48146 \begin_inset space ~
48150 \begin_inset Index idx
48153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48162 \begin_layout Subsection
48164 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48166 name "subsec:Converters"
48171 \begin_inset Index idx
48174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48183 \begin_layout Standard
48184 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
48185 from one format to another.
48186 You can modify converters or create new ones.
48187 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
48194 \begin_inset space ~
48199 field and press the
48204 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
48208 \begin_inset space ~
48213 drop-down list, modify the
48217 field and press the
48224 \begin_layout Standard
48227 Converter File Cache
48233 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48235 Maximum Age (in days
48238 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48239 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48242 \begin_layout Standard
48243 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48244 definition, is described in the section
48255 \begin_layout Subsection
48257 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48259 name "sec:File-Formats"
48264 \begin_inset Index idx
48267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48274 \begin_inset Index idx
48277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48286 \begin_layout Standard
48287 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48297 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48300 \begin_layout Standard
48301 You can also define the
48303 Default output format
48305 that is used when you use
48307 View, Update, View Master Document
48311 Update Master Document
48317 menu or the toolbar.
48320 \begin_layout Standard
48321 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48332 \begin_layout Standard
48333 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48335 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48336 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48337 This is done by specifying a
48342 More about this is described in the section
48353 \begin_layout Chapter
48354 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48356 \begin_inset Index idx
48359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48366 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48368 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48375 \begin_layout Standard
48377 \begin_inset space ~
48381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48383 reference "tab:Units"
48387 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48388 and used in this documentation.
48391 \begin_layout Standard
48392 \begin_inset Float table
48398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48399 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48402 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48417 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48425 \begin_inset Tabular
48426 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
48427 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48428 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48429 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
48430 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48476 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48480 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48513 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48517 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48579 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48583 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48744 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48785 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48818 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48822 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48854 scaled point (65536
48855 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48859 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48922 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
48927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49046 % of original image width
49051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49135 \begin_layout Standard
49136 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49139 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49146 \begin_layout Bibliography
49147 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49148 LatexCommand bibitem
49155 The \SpecialChar LyX
49157 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49160 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49166 \begin_inset Newline newline
49170 \begin_inset Flex URL
49173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49175 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
49183 \begin_layout Bibliography
49184 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49185 LatexCommand bibitem
49186 key "latexcompanion"
49191 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49193 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49194 Companion Second Edition.
49197 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49200 \begin_layout Bibliography
49201 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49202 LatexCommand bibitem
49208 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49211 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49215 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49218 \begin_layout Bibliography
49219 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49220 LatexCommand bibitem
49229 : A Document Preparation System.
49232 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49235 \begin_layout Bibliography
49236 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49237 LatexCommand bibitem
49247 The \SpecialChar TeX
49251 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49254 \begin_layout Bibliography
49255 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49256 LatexCommand bibitem
49262 The \SpecialChar TeX
49264 \begin_inset Newline newline
49268 \begin_inset Flex URL
49271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49273 http://texcatalogue.ctan.org/bytopic.html
49281 \begin_layout Bibliography
49282 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49283 LatexCommand bibitem
49289 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49291 \begin_inset Newline newline
49295 \begin_inset Flex URL
49298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49300 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49308 \begin_layout Bibliography
49309 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49310 LatexCommand bibitem
49317 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49319 name "Documentation"
49320 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49327 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49331 \begin_inset Newline newline
49335 \begin_inset Flex URL
49338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49340 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49348 \begin_layout Bibliography
49349 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49350 LatexCommand bibitem
49357 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49359 name "Documentation"
49360 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49365 how to use the program
49367 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49371 \begin_inset Newline newline
49375 \begin_inset Flex URL
49378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49380 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49388 \begin_layout Bibliography
49389 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49390 LatexCommand bibitem
49397 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49399 name "Documentation"
49400 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49405 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49411 \begin_inset Index idx
49414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49416 packages ! biblatex
49422 \begin_inset Newline newline
49426 \begin_inset Flex URL
49429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49431 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49439 \begin_layout Bibliography
49440 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49441 LatexCommand bibitem
49448 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49450 name "Documentation"
49451 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
49456 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49462 \begin_inset Index idx
49465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49473 \begin_inset Newline newline
49477 \begin_inset Flex URL
49480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49482 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
49490 \begin_layout Bibliography
49491 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49492 LatexCommand bibitem
49499 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49501 name "Documentation"
49502 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49512 \begin_inset Newline newline
49516 \begin_inset Flex URL
49519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49521 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49529 \begin_layout Bibliography
49530 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49531 LatexCommand bibitem
49532 key "makeindex-man"
49538 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49541 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49551 \begin_inset Newline newline
49555 \begin_inset Flex URL
49558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49560 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49568 \begin_layout Bibliography
49569 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49570 LatexCommand bibitem
49577 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49579 name "Documentation"
49580 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49590 \begin_inset Newline newline
49594 \begin_inset Flex URL
49597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49599 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49607 \begin_layout Bibliography
49608 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49609 LatexCommand bibitem
49616 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49618 name "Documentation"
49619 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49624 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49626 \begin_inset Newline newline
49630 \begin_inset Flex URL
49633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49635 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49643 \begin_layout Bibliography
49644 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49645 LatexCommand bibitem
49652 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49654 name "Documentation"
49655 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49660 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49666 \begin_inset Index idx
49669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49677 \begin_inset Newline newline
49681 \begin_inset Flex URL
49684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49686 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49694 \begin_layout Bibliography
49695 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49696 LatexCommand bibitem
49703 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49705 name "Documentation"
49706 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49711 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49717 \begin_inset Index idx
49720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49722 packages ! enumitem
49728 \begin_inset Newline newline
49732 \begin_inset Flex URL
49735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49737 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49745 \begin_layout Bibliography
49746 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49747 LatexCommand bibitem
49754 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49756 name "Documentation"
49757 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49762 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49768 \begin_inset Index idx
49771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49773 packages ! fancyhdr
49779 \begin_inset Newline newline
49783 \begin_inset Flex URL
49786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49788 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49796 \begin_layout Bibliography
49797 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49798 LatexCommand bibitem
49805 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49807 name "Documentation"
49808 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
49813 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49819 \begin_inset Index idx
49822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49824 packages ! hyperref
49830 \begin_inset Newline newline
49834 \begin_inset Flex URL
49837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49839 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
49847 \begin_layout Bibliography
49848 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49849 LatexCommand bibitem
49856 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49858 name "Documentation"
49859 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
49864 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49870 \begin_inset Index idx
49873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49875 packages ! microtpye
49881 \begin_inset Newline newline
49885 \begin_inset Flex URL
49888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49890 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
49898 \begin_layout Bibliography
49899 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49900 LatexCommand bibitem
49907 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49909 name "Documentation"
49910 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49915 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49921 \begin_inset Index idx
49924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49932 \begin_inset Newline newline
49936 \begin_inset Flex URL
49939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49941 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
49949 \begin_layout Bibliography
49950 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49951 LatexCommand bibitem
49958 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49960 name "Documentation"
49961 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
49966 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49972 \begin_inset Index idx
49975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49977 packages ! prettyref
49983 \begin_inset Newline newline
49987 \begin_inset Flex URL
49990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49992 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
50000 \begin_layout Bibliography
50001 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50002 LatexCommand bibitem
50009 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50011 name "Documentation"
50012 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
50017 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50023 \begin_inset Index idx
50026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50028 packages ! refstyle
50034 \begin_inset Newline newline
50038 \begin_inset Flex URL
50041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50043 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
50051 \begin_layout Bibliography
50052 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50053 LatexCommand bibitem
50060 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50063 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
50068 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50070 \begin_inset Newline newline
50074 \begin_inset Flex URL
50077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50079 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
50087 \begin_layout Bibliography
50088 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50089 LatexCommand bibitem
50096 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50099 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
50104 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50106 \begin_inset Newline newline
50110 \begin_inset Flex URL
50113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50115 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
50123 \begin_layout Bibliography
50124 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50125 LatexCommand bibitem
50132 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50135 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
50140 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50141 for Cyrillic languages:
50142 \begin_inset Newline newline
50146 \begin_inset Flex URL
50149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50151 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
50159 \begin_layout Bibliography
50160 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50161 LatexCommand bibitem
50168 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50171 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
50176 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50178 \begin_inset Newline newline
50182 \begin_inset Flex URL
50185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50187 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50195 \begin_layout Bibliography
50196 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50197 LatexCommand bibitem
50204 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50207 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50212 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50214 \begin_inset Newline newline
50218 \begin_inset Flex URL
50221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50223 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50231 \begin_layout Bibliography
50232 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50233 LatexCommand bibitem
50240 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50243 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50248 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50250 \begin_inset Newline newline
50254 \begin_inset Flex URL
50257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50259 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50267 \begin_layout Standard
50268 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50302 \begin_inset Note Note
50305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50312 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50313 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50314 bibliography is the second one:
50322 \begin_layout Standard
50323 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50324 LatexCommand bibtex
50325 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50326 options "biblio/alphadin"
50333 \begin_layout Standard
50334 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50338 \begin_layout Standard
50342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50348 pagedeclaration}[1]{
50351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50357 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
50365 \begin_inset Note Note
50368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50369 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
50370 \begin_inset space ~
50374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50376 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
50388 \begin_layout Standard
50389 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50390 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50396 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50397 LatexCommand printindex